Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 Bedienungsanleitung

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754

Zur Seite of

Richtige Gebrauchsanleitung

Die Vorschriften verpflichten den Verkäufer zur Übertragung der Gebrauchsanleitung Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 an den Erwerber, zusammen mit der Ware. Eine fehlende Anleitung oder falsche Informationen, die dem Verbraucher übertragen werden, bilden eine Grundlage für eine Reklamation aufgrund Unstimmigkeit des Geräts mit dem Vertrag. Rechtsmäßig lässt man das Anfügen einer Gebrauchsanleitung in anderer Form als Papierform zu, was letztens sehr oft genutzt wird, indem man eine grafische oder elektronische Anleitung von Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000, sowie Anleitungsvideos für Nutzer beifügt. Die Bedingung ist, dass ihre Form leserlich und verständlich ist.

Was ist eine Gebrauchsanleitung?

Das Wort kommt vom lateinischen „instructio”, d.h. ordnen. Demnach kann man in der Anleitung Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 die Beschreibung der Etappen der Vorgehensweisen finden. Das Ziel der Anleitung ist die Belehrung, Vereinfachung des Starts, der Nutzung des Geräts oder auch der Ausführung bestimmter Tätigkeiten. Die Anleitung ist eine Sammlung von Informationen über ein Gegenstand/eine Dienstleistung, ein Hinweis.

Leider widmen nicht viele Nutzer ihre Zeit der Gebrauchsanleitung Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000. Eine gute Gebrauchsanleitung erlaubt nicht nur eine Reihe zusätzlicher Funktionen des gekauften Geräts kennenzulernen, sondern hilft dabei viele Fehler zu vermeiden.

Was sollte also eine ideale Gebrauchsanleitung beinhalten?

Die Gebrauchsanleitung Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 sollte vor allem folgendes enthalten:
- Informationen über technische Daten des Geräts Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000
- Den Namen des Produzenten und das Produktionsjahr des Geräts Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000
- Grundsätze der Bedienung, Regulierung und Wartung des Geräts Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000
- Sicherheitszeichen und Zertifikate, die die Übereinstimmung mit entsprechenden Normen bestätigen

Warum lesen wir keine Gebrauchsanleitungen?

Der Grund dafür ist die fehlende Zeit und die Sicherheit, was die bestimmten Funktionen der gekauften Geräte angeht. Leider ist das Anschließen und Starten von Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 zu wenig. Eine Anleitung beinhaltet eine Reihe von Hinweisen bezüglich bestimmter Funktionen, Sicherheitsgrundsätze, Wartungsarten (sogar das, welche Mittel man benutzen sollte), eventueller Fehler von Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 und Lösungsarten für Probleme, die während der Nutzung auftreten könnten. Immerhin kann man in der Gebrauchsanleitung die Kontaktnummer zum Service Mitsubishi Electronics finden, wenn die vorgeschlagenen Lösungen nicht wirksam sind. Aktuell erfreuen sich Anleitungen in Form von interessanten Animationen oder Videoanleitungen an Popularität, die den Nutzer besser ansprechen als eine Broschüre. Diese Art von Anleitung gibt garantiert, dass der Nutzer sich das ganze Video anschaut, ohne die spezifizierten und komplizierten technischen Beschreibungen von Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 zu überspringen, wie es bei der Papierform passiert.

Warum sollte man Gebrauchsanleitungen lesen?

In der Gebrauchsanleitung finden wir vor allem die Antwort über den Bau sowie die Möglichkeiten des Geräts Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000, über die Nutzung bestimmter Accessoires und eine Reihe von Informationen, die erlauben, jegliche Funktionen und Bequemlichkeiten zu nutzen.

Nach dem gelungenen Kauf des Geräts, sollte man einige Zeit für das Kennenlernen jedes Teils der Anleitung von Mitsubishi Electronics GOT1000 widmen. Aktuell sind sie genau vorbereitet oder übersetzt, damit sie nicht nur verständlich für die Nutzer sind, aber auch ihre grundliegende Hilfs-Informations-Funktion erfüllen.

Inhaltsverzeichnis der Gebrauchsanleitungen

  • Seite 1

    BUS CONNECTION BUS CONNECTION DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION ETHERNET CONNECTION ETHERNET CONNECTION MELSECNET/H CONNECTION MELSECNET/H CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONNECTION CC-Link IE CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION CC-Link CONNECTION IN[...]

  • Seite 2

    [...]

  • Seite 3

    A - 1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS (Always read these precautions before using this equipment.) Before using this product, please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly . The precautions given in this manual are concerne d with this product. In this manual[...]

  • Seite 4

    A - 2 [DESIGN PRECAUTIONS] W ARNING ● Incorrect operation of the touch switch(s) may lead to a serious acciden t if the GOT backlight is gone out. When the GOT backlight goes ou t, the display sect ion dims, while the input of the touch switch(s) remains active. This may confuse an operator in thinking that t he GOT is in "scre ensaver"[...]

  • Seite 5

    A - 3 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] WA R N I N G ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external pow er supply used by the system before mounting or removing the GOT to/from the panel. Not switching the power off in all phases can cause a unit failu re or malfunction. ● Be sure to shut off all phases of the external pow er supply used by the system b[...]

  • Seite 6

    A - 4 [MOUNTING PRECAUTIONS] [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When inserting/removing a CF card into /from the GOT(GT16, GT15, GT1 1 ), turn the CF card access switch off in advance. Failure to do so may corrupt data within the CF card. ● When removing a SD card from the GOT(GT14), ma ke sure to support the SD card by hand, as it may pop out. Fai[...]

  • Seite 7

    A - 5 [WIRING PRECAUTIONS] [TEST OPERA TION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● Correctly wire the GOT power supp ly secti on after confirming the rated voltage and terminal arrangement of the pr oduct. Not doing so can cause a fire or failure. ● T ighten the terminal screws of the GOT power supply section in the specified torque range. Undertightening ca n[...]

  • Seite 8

    A - 6 [ST ARTUP/MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS] W ARNING ● When power is on, do not touch the terminals. Doing so can cause an elec tric shock or malfunction. ● Correctly connect t he battery connector . Do not charge, disassemble, heat, short-circuit, solder , or throw the battery into the fire. Doing so will cause the battery to produce heat, explod[...]

  • Seite 9

    A - 7 [T OUCH P ANEL PRECAUTIONS] [BACKLIGHT REPLACEM ENT PRECAUTIONS] [DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● For the analog-resistive film type touch panels, normally the adjustment is not required. Howe ver , the difference between a touch ed position and the object position may occu r as the period of use elapses. When any difference between a touch[...]

  • Seite 10

    A - 8 [TRANSPORT A TION PRECAUTIONS] CAUTION ● When transporting lith ium batteries, make sure to treat the m based on the tra nsport regulation s. (For details on models subject to restrictions, refe r to the User's Manual for the GOT you are using.) ● Make sure to trans port the GOT main unit and /or relevant unit(s) in the manner they w[...]

  • Seite 11

    A - 9 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS .............. ............. ............ ................. ............. ................ ............. ........... ............ A - 1 INTRODUCTION .... ............. ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. .............. ................... A - 9 CONTENTS ............ ....[...]

  • Seite 12

    A - 10 MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS 2.DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD -700........ ................ ................ ................. .................. 2 - 8 2.2 MELSEC-L ............. ................ ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ... ..................[...]

  • Seite 13

    A - 11 4.8.4 CC-Link connection (Via G4) (Connection to the CC-Link mod ule mounted on redund ant type extension base unit) ..... 4 - 28 4.9 Q Redundant Setting ........ ................. ............ ................. ............. ............ ................. ................... .. 4 - 29 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to t h e Control System U[...]

  • Seite 14

    A - 12 6.3 Connection Diagram ........... ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ................ ........ ............ 6 - 22 6.3.1 RS-232 cable ........... ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ................ ............ ........ 6 - 22 6.3.2 RS-422 cable ........... ..[...]

  • Seite 15

    A - 13 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-i n Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) .......... ................ ............... 8 - 22 8.4.3 Connecting to Ethernet module (Q/L Series) ... .................... ................ ................ ............... 8 - 24 8.4.4 Connecting to C Controller module ........................ ................ .........[...]

  • Seite 16

    A - 14 11.CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 11.1 Connectable Model List ...... ................ ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ........ ............ 11 - 2 11.1.1 PLC/Motion c ontroller CPU ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ............ .1 1 [...]

  • Seite 17

    A - 15 14.CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List ........... ................ ................ .................... ................ ................ ...... ....... ..... 14 - 2 14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU .......... ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ............... 14 - 2 14.1.2 CC-Li[...]

  • Seite 18

    A - 16 15.5.12 Station number setting ............. ............. ............. ................ ............. ................ ............. . .... 15 - 43 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set .................. ................ ................ ................ .................... ......... ... .. 15 - 44 15.7 Precautions ............... ..........[...]

  • Seite 19

    A - 17 18.4 GOT Side Settings ......... ................ ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ .......... ............. .. 18 - 8 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) ......... ................. ............ ......... 18 - 8 18.4.2 Communication detail settings ............ ..........[...]

  • Seite 20

    A - 18 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? ... ................ ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ .. ........ 21 - 2 21.2 System Configuration ... ............. ................ ............. ............. ................ ............. ............. ... ...[...]

  • Seite 21

    A - 19 22.6.12 Accessing by RT ToolBox2 ................ ................. ................... ................ ................ .......... 22 - 61 22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator ........ ................ ................. ................... ................ ............. 22 - 6 3 22.6.14 Accessing by MELSOFT Navigator .... .................[...]

  • Seite 22

    A - 20 MANUALS The following table lists the manual relevant to this product. Refer to each manual for any purpose.  Screen creation sof tware manuals  Connection manuals  Extended and option function manuals  GT Sof tGOT1000 manuals Manual Name Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GT Works3 V ersion1 Installat ion Procedure Manual Encl[...]

  • Seite 23

    A - 21  GT16 manuals  GT15 manuals  GT14 manuals  GT12 manuals  GT1 1 manuals  GT10 manuals Manual Name Packaging Manual Number (Model code) GT16 User's Manual (Ha rdware) S tored in CD-ROM SH-080928ENG (1D7MD3) GT16 User's Manual (Basic Utilit y) S tored in CD-ROM SH-080929ENG (1D7MD4) GT16 Handy GOT User's Manua l[...]

  • Seite 24

    A - 22 QUICK REFERENCE  Creating a project  Connecting a controller to the GOT  T ransferring data to the GOT Obtaining the specifications and operation methods of GT Designer3 GT Designer3 V ersion1 Screen Design Manual (Fundamentals) 1/2, 2/2 Setting available functions on GT Designer3 Creating a screen displayed on the GOT Obtaining use[...]

  • Seite 25

    A - 23  Others Obtaining specifications (including part names, external dimensions, and options) of each GOT • GT16 User's Manual (Hardware) • GT16 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT15 User's Manual • GT14 User's Manual • GT12 User's Manual • GT1 1 User's Manual • GT1 1 Handy GOT User's Manual • GT10 [...]

  • Seite 26

    A - 24 ABBREVIA TIONS AND GENERIC TERMS  GOT Abbreviations and generic terms Description GOT1000 Series GT1695 GT1695M-X Abbreviation of GT1695M-XTBA, GT1695M- XTBD GT1685 GT1685M-S Abbreviation of GT1685M-STBA, GT1685M- STBD GT1675 GT1675M-S Abbrevuation GT1575 -STBA, GT1575-STBD GT1675M-V Abbreviation of GT1675M-VTBA, GT1675M- VTBD GT1675-VN A[...]

  • Seite 27

    A - 25  Communication unit *1 A9GT -QJ71LP23+GT15-75IF900 set *2 A9GT -QJ71BR13+GT15-75IF900 se t *3 A8GT -J61BT13+GT15-75IF900 set  Option unit *1 GT15-CFEX+GT15-CFEXIF+GT15-C08CF set GOT1000 Series Handy GOT GT16 Handy GOT GT1665HS-V Abbreviation of GT1665HS-VTBD GT1 1 Handy GOT GT1 155HS-Q Abbreviation of GT1 155HS-QSBD GT1 150HS-Q Abbrevi[...]

  • Seite 28

    A - 26  Option Abbreviations and g eneric terms Description Memory card CF card GT05-MEM-16MC, GT05-MEM-32MC, GT05 -MEM-64MC, GT05-MEM-128MC, GT05-MEM-256MC, GT05-MEM- 512MC, GT05-MEM-1GC, GT05-MEM-2GC, GT05-MEM-4GC, GT05-MEM- 8GC, GT05-MEM-16GC SD card L1MEM-2GBSD, L1MEM-4 GBSD Memory card adaptor GT05-MEM-ADPC Option function board GT16-MESB, [...]

  • Seite 29

    A - 27  Sof tware  License key (for GT Sof tGOT1000) Abbreviations and generic terms Description GT Works3 Abbreviation of the SW DNC-GTWK3-E and SW DNC-GTWK3-EA GT Designer3 Abbreviation of screen drawin g software GT Designer3 for GOT1000 series GT Simulator3 Abbreviation of screen si mulator GT Simulator3 for GOT1000/G OT900 series GT Soft[...]

  • Seite 30

    A - 28  Others Abbreviations a nd generic terms Description IAI Abbreviation of I AI Corporation AZBIL Abbreviation of Azbil Corporation (fo rmer Y amatake Corporation) OMRON Abbreviation of OMRON Corporation KEYENCE Abbreviation of KEYENCE CORPORA TION KOYO EI Abbreviation of KOYO EL ECTRONICS INDUSTRIES CO., L TD. SHARP Abbreviation of Sharp M[...]

  • Seite 31

    A - 29 HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL  Symbols Following symbols are used in this manual. Since the above page was created for explanatio n purpo se, it differs from the actual page. Not connectable model name Connectable model name BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List 5 - 2 Applicable model name Shows GT16. Shows GT15. Shows GT1 1. Shows GT1 1 (B[...]

  • Seite 32

    A - 30  About system configuration The following describes the system configuration of each connec tion included in this manual. Since the above page was created for explanation pu rpose, it differs from the actual page. The configuration of The configuration of equipment connected equipment connected to GOT is shown. to GOT is shown. The cable [...]

  • Seite 33

    1 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1 - 1 1. PREP ARA T OR Y PROCEDURES FOR MONIT ORING 1.1 Setting the Communication Inter face . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Seite 34

    1 - 2 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1. PREP ARA T OR Y PROCEDURES FOR MONIT ORING The following sho ws the procedures to be taken before monitoring and corresponding re ference sections. Setting the communication interface Determine the connection type and channel No. to be used, an d perform the communication setting. 1.1 Setting the C[...]

  • Seite 35

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.1 Setting the Communicatio[...]

  • Seite 36

    1 - 4 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface 1.1.1 Setting connected equipment (Channel setting) Set the channel of the equipment connected to the GOT .  Setting 1. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] from the me nu. 2. The Controller Setting dialog box appears. Select the channel No. to be used from [...]

  • Seite 37

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Setting item This sectio[...]

  • Seite 38

    1 - 6 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface (2) Setting [Controller T ype] The types for the selection differs depending on the PLC to be used. For the settings, re fer to the following. *1 When using the mult iple CPU system When using the GOT to monitor the multiple CPU system of other station, se lect[...]

  • Seite 39

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Ty p e Model name MELSEC-A A[...]

  • Seite 40

    1 - 8 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface (3) Setting [I/F] The interface differs depending on the GOT to be used. Set the I/F according to the connection and the position of communication unit to be mounted onto the GOT . (a) GT16 (b) GT15 3rd stage Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 Standard[...]

  • Seite 41

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (c) GT14 (d) GT12 Standard i[...]

  • Seite 42

    1 - 10 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface (e) GT1 1 •G T 1 1 S e r i a l •G T 1 1 B u s Standard interface 3 (GOT built-in USB interface) [Front view] [Rear view] Standard interface 1 (GOT built-in RS-422 interface) Standard interface 2 (GOT built-in RS-232 interface) Standard interface 3 (GOT bui[...]

  • Seite 43

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (f) GT105 (g) GT104 (h) GT1[...]

  • Seite 44

    1 - 12 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface 1.1.2 I/F communication setting This function displays the list of th e GOT communication interfaces. Set the channel and the communication drive r to the interface to be used.  Setting 1. Select [Common] [I/F Communic ation Setting] from the menu. 2. The I[...]

  • Seite 45

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Communication In terface 1 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Setting item The follow[...]

  • Seite 46

    1 - 14 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.1 Setting the Commu nication Interface POINT POINT POINT Channel No., drivers, [RS232 Setting] (1) Channel No.2 to No.4 Use the channel No.2 to No.4 when using the Mu lti-channel function. For details of the Multi-channel function, refer to the following. Mitsubishi Products 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNC[...]

  • Seite 47

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Da ta and OS on to the GOT 1 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.2 W riting the [...]

  • Seite 48

    1 - 16 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.2 Writing the Project Data and OS onto the GOT 1.2.2 Checking the project data and OS writing on GOT Confirm if the standard monitor OS, co mmunication driver , op tion OS, project data and communication settings are properly written onto th e GOT by reading fro m GOT using GT Designer3. For readin[...]

  • Seite 49

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.3 Option Devices [...]

  • Seite 50

    1 - 18 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1.3.2 Option unit 1.3.3 Conversion cables 1.3.4 Connector conversion adapter 1.3.5 Serial Multi-Dr op Connection Unit 1.3.6 RS-232/485 signal conversion adapter Product name Model S pecifications Printer unit GT15-PRN USB slave (PictBridge) for connect[...]

  • Seite 51

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.3.7 Inst alling a[...]

  • Seite 52

    1 - 20 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection (3) Calculation example (a) When connect ing the GT15-J71BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 unit s), GT15-J71E71-100 (For the gateway function) and a bar code r eader (0.12 A) to the GT1575-V Since the calculated value is within the capacity of the GOT , they can b [...]

  • Seite 53

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT C[...]

  • Seite 54

    1 - 22 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection  When using a MELSECNET/H communicatio n unit, CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit, CC-Link IE Field Networ k communication unit, or CC-Link communication unit (GT15-J61BT13) Install a MELSECNET/H communication unit, CC-Link IE Cont rol[...]

  • Seite 55

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When using a ME[...]

  • Seite 56

    1 - 24 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection  When using the printer unit, sound output unit, or external I/O unit The printer unit, sound output uni t, or ex ternal I/O unit can be installed in any po sition (1st to 3rd stage) of the extension i nterface. Example: When installing a printer un[...]

  • Seite 57

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.3 Option Devices for the Respective Connection 1 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT P[...]

  • Seite 58

    1 - 26 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables fo r the Respective Conne ction 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection T o conne ct the GOT to a d evice in the respecti ve connection typ e, connection cables betw een the GOT and a device are necessary . For cables needed for each connection, refer to each chapter[...]

  • Seite 59

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  RS-422 inter[...]

  • Seite 60

    1 - 28 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables fo r the Respective Conne ction  RS-485 interface Use the following as the RS-485 interface and the RS-422/485 communication unit connector on the GOT . For the GOT side of the connection cable , use a connec tor and conn ector cover applicable to the GOT connector . (1) Conn[...]

  • Seite 61

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.4.2 Coaxial ca[...]

  • Seite 62

    1 - 30 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables fo r the Respective Conne ction 1.4.3 T erminating resistors of GOT The following shows the terminating resistor specification s on the GOT side. When setting the terminating resisto r in each connection type, refer to the following.  RS-422/485 communication unit Set the ter[...]

  • Seite 63

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 31 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  GT12 Set the[...]

  • Seite 64

    1 - 32 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables fo r the Respective Conne ction  GT1030 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch.  GT1020 Set the terminating resistor using the terminating resistor setting switch. Terminating resistor selector switch Terminating resistor selector switch[...]

  • Seite 65

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.4 Connection Cables for the Respective Connection 1 - 33 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.4.4 Setting th[...]

  • Seite 66

    1 - 34 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognize s Connected Equipment 1.5 V erifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equipment V erify the GOT recogni zes controllers on [Communication Settings] of the Utility . • Channel number of communicatio n interface, communication dri vers allocation status • Communica tion unit ins[...]

  • Seite 67

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equip ment 1 - 35 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3. The [Communicat[...]

  • Seite 68

    1 - 36 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognize s Connected Equipment  For GT15, GT14 or GT1 1 1. After powering up the GOT , touch [Main Menu] [Communication setting] from the Utility . 2. T ouch [Communica tion setting]. (The screen on the left is not displayed on GT1 1.) 3. The [Communication Setting] appears. 4. [...]

  • Seite 69

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognizes Connected Equip ment 1 - 37 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  For GT10 1. Af[...]

  • Seite 70

    1 - 38 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.5 Verifying GOT Recognize s Connected Equipment POINT POINT POINT Utility (1) How to display Utility (at default) (2) Utility call When setting [Pressing time] to other than 0 second o n the setting screen of the utility call key , press and hold the utility call key until the buzzer sou nds.For th[...]

  • Seite 71

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 39 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitorin[...]

  • Seite 72

    1 - 40 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring  Perform an I/O check Whether the PLC can communicate with the GOT or not can be checked by the I/O check function. If this check ends successfully , it means correct co mmunication interface settings and proper cable connection. Display the I/O ch eck screen by [...]

  • Seite 73

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 41 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Communication monitoring func[...]

  • Seite 74

    1 - 42 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring  Confirming the communication st atus with network unit by GOT (1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system The communication status between the GOT and the MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system can be confirmed by the Utility screen of t he GOT . For deta[...]

  • Seite 75

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 43 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) For CC-Link IE Controller Net[...]

  • Seite 76

    1 - 44 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring (4) For CC-Link system The communication status between the GOT and the CC-Li nk System can be confirmed by the Utility screen of the GOT . For details on the operation met hod of the GOT Utility screen, refer to the follow ing manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic[...]

  • Seite 77

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 45 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.6.2 Confirming the communicatio[...]

  • Seite 78

    1 - 46 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring  Confirming the communication st ate on the GOT (For GT16, GT14) [PING T est] can be confir med by the Util ity screen of the GOT . For details on the operation metho d of the GO T Utility screen, refer to the following manual. GT16 User's Manual (Basic Util[...]

  • Seite 79

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 47 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.6.3 Confirming the communicatio[...]

  • Seite 80

    1 - 48 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring (2) Faulty station information (GS231 to GS238) The bit corresponding to the faulty station is set.(0: Normal, 1: Abnormal) The bit is reset after the fault is recovered. (a) Ethernet connection (Except for Ethernet multiple connection) (b) Ethernet multiple connect[...]

  • Seite 81

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 49 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Network No., station No. noti[...]

  • Seite 82

    1 - 50 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1.6.4 Check on GX Developer  Check if the PLC CPU recognize s the GOT (For bus connection) (QCPU (Q mod e) only) Using the [System monitor] of GX Developer , ch eck if the PLC CPU recognizes th e GOT or not. For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the fol[...]

  • Seite 83

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 51 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Checking the wiring st ate (F[...]

  • Seite 84

    1 - 52 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring  Checking if the GOT is performed the dat a link correctly (1) For MELSECNET/H, MELSECNET/10 network system Check if the GOT is performed the data link correctly in [Other station information] . For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the follow ing manua[...]

  • Seite 85

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 53 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) For CC-Link IE Controller Net[...]

  • Seite 86

    1 - 54 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1.6.5 Check on GX Works2  For CC-Link IE Field Network system Use [CC IE Field diagnostics] of GX W o rks2 to c heck if the GOT is correctly performed the data link. For the GX Works2 operation method, refer to the followin g manual. MELSEC-Q CC-Link IE Field Net[...]

  • Seite 87

    1. PREPARATORY PROCE DURES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring 1 - 55 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1.6.6 Check on the PLC  Checki[...]

  • Seite 88

    1 - 56 1. PREPARATORY PROCED URES FOR MONITORING 1.6 Checking for Normal Monitoring[...]

  • Seite 89

    MITSUBISHI PLC CONNECTIONS 2. DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1 3. ACCESS RAN GE FOR MONITORING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1 4. HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1 5. BUS CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1 6. DIRECT CONNECTION [...]

  • Seite 90

    [...]

  • Seite 91

    2 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2 - 1 2. DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR , CRnD-700 . . . . . . . 2 - 8 2.2 MELSEC-L[...]

  • Seite 92

    2 - 2 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2. DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET The device ranges that can be set for the Mitsubishi PLCs are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the fo llowing tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Designer3. The device specification s of c ontrollers may differ depending on the models, even though belon[...]

  • Seite 93

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Setting item (For MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC /DR, CRnD-700) (For MEL SEC-F X[...]

  • Seite 94

    2 - 4 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET (1) Setting of the CPU No. (a) When monitoring a single CPU system Set to 0. (b) When monitoring a multiple CPU system Set the CPU No. (0 to 4) in [CPU No.] when monitoring a multiple CPU system. When [CPU No.] is set to "0", the monitoring target differs depending on the con nection method. (2) When [...]

  • Seite 95

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (4) Setting of the mask type (MELSEC-FX) Set the item for monitoring or writing[...]

  • Seite 96

    2 - 6 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET • (For 32 bits) Monitor and write only b8 to b1 1 and b28 to 31 of the buffer memory . Example: The monitor value is 00070003 H when monitoring BM0=87654321 H as mask type 3. BM0=05000100 H wh en writing input value 87654321 H to BM0=0000000 0 H as mask type 3. (e) Mask type 4 • (For 16 bits) Monitor and wr[...]

  • Seite 97

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION •( F o r 3 2 b i t s ) Monitor and write only b8 to b15 and b24 to 31 of the [...]

  • Seite 98

    2 - 8 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 The table below shows the device ranges in [MELSEC- QnU/DC, Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700] *10 as the controller type. *1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file regi ste[...]

  • Seite 99

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.2 MELSEC-L 2 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2.2 MELSEC-L The device ranges that can be set when s electing [ME[...]

  • Seite 100

    2 - 10 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * 2.3 MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6 * The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-QnA/Q/QS, MELDAS C6*] *13 as the controller type are as follows. *1 Do not set a file register by GT Designer3 when executing multiple programs with the file of the file regi ster set at [[...]

  • Seite 101

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion 2 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2.4 MELSEC-Q (Multi)/Q Motion The device ranges [...]

  • Seite 102

    2 - 12 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.5 MELSEC-A 2.5 MELSEC-A The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-A] as the controller type are as follows. (1) For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12, GT1 1 *1 In the computer li nk connection, the bit specification writing of the word d evice to the ER29-0 (block 29 of th e extension file register) or l[...]

  • Seite 103

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.6 MELSEC-FX 2 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 2.6 MELSEC-FX The device ranges that can be set when s electing [...]

  • Seite 104

    2 - 14 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS 2.7 MELSEC-WS The device ranges that can be set when selecting [MELSEC-WS] as the controller type are as follows. POINT POINT POINT (1) Devices of MELSEC-WS Only reading is possible for all devices. (2) Device settings of MELSEC-WS • Input(I), Output(Q) • Logic result(LQ), Logic inp ut(LI) ?[...]

  • Seite 105

    2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS 2 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (4) When using of fset sp ecification When setting devices using[...]

  • Seite 106

    2 - 16 2. DEVICE RANGE THAT CAN BE SET 2.7 MELSEC-WS[...]

  • Seite 107

    3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3 - 1 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONIT ORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring S tations on Network Systems . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Seite 108

    3 - 2 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONIT ORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring S t ations on Network Systems 3.1.1 MELSECNET/H, MELSE CNET/10, CC-Link IE Controller Network, C C-Link IE Field Network  Bus connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • Th[...]

  • Seite 109

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) When connecting [...]

  • Seite 110

    3 - 4 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems  Direct CPU connection/computer link connection (1) When connecting to multiple CPU system • Corresponding to the access range described in ■ Bus connectio n (1). (2) When connecting to QCPU (Q mode)/QnACPU • Corresponding to the access range d[...]

  • Seite 111

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  MELSECNET/H conn[...]

  • Seite 112

    3 - 6 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems POINT POINT POINT Precautions when using the QCPU re dundant system When monitoring other ne tworks, do not set the QCPU redundant system as a re lay station. If the QCPU redundant system is set as a relay st ation, t he GOT cannot switch the moni torin[...]

  • Seite 113

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Monitor accessib[...]

  • Seite 114

    3 - 8 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Example 2: When using bus connection • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks S pecify the accessing network No. or st ation as shown in the following table. (1) T o moni tor B or W of the connected[...]

  • Seite 115

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Example 3: When usin[...]

  • Seite 116

    3 - 10 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Example 4: When usin g CPU direct connection o r computer link connection • Monitor accessible range of devices (other than B or W) of other stations or other networks S pecify the accessing network No. or st ation as shown in the following table. (1[...]

  • Seite 117

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems 3 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Example 5: When usi[...]

  • Seite 118

    3 - 12 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.1 Access Range for Monitoring Stations on Network Systems Example 6: When usin g CC-Link connection (intelligent device station) /CC-Link connection (via G4) : Accessible : Not accessible S tation to be accessed S tation connected to GOT QnA (1-1) Q (Q mode) (1-2) AnA (1-3) AnN (1-4) QnA (1-1) Q(Q mode) (1-2)[...]

  • Seite 119

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.2 Access Range for Monitoring when Using Ethernet Con nection 3 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3.2 Access Rang[...]

  • Seite 120

    3 - 14 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring  When using Bus connection/CPU direct connection/computer link connection Only connected stations can be monitored.  When using CC-Link connection (intellige nt device station) (1) Access range The master station[...]

  • Seite 121

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring 3 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (b) Monitoring PLC CPU devi ces [...]

  • Seite 122

    3 - 16 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.3 CC-Link System Access Range for Monitoring  Monitoring overview The following two methods are availa ble for monitoring by the GOT with CC-Link communication uni t. *1 This program is not required if the CC-Link parameter se tting sequence program and GOT communication sequence program satisfy the follow[...]

  • Seite 123

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.4 Data Link System (MELSECNET/B, (II)) Access Range for Monitoring 3 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3.4 Dat a [...]

  • Seite 124

    3 - 18 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.5 Access Range for Monitoring when Connecting FXCPU  Setting method of monitor device The following example descri bes the method of setting the network No. and the station numbers when setting monitor devices . (1) Monitoring the connected station (host station ) and B and W allocated by the link paramete[...]

  • Seite 125

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Stat ion in MELSECNET/H Networ k System 3 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 3.6 Connec[...]

  • Seite 126

    3 - 20 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System  Direct CPU connection (1) The network units (QJ72LP25-25, QJ72LP25G , QP72BR15) of the remote I/O station are handled as PLC CPU. Connect the GOT to the RS-232 interface of the network unit. For cables required for connection with th e netwo[...]

  • Seite 127

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.6 Connection to Remote I/O Stat ion in MELSECNET/H Networ k System 3 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Ethern[...]

  • Seite 128

    3 - 22 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Modul e of CC-L ink IE Field Ne twork System 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Field Network System When connected to the head module o f the CC-Link IE Field Network, the GOT can monitor the PLC CPUs of the master station and local stations. When connecting the GOT to t[...]

  • Seite 129

    3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Module of CC-Link IE Fi eld Network System 3 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POI[...]

  • Seite 130

    3 - 24 3. ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 3.7 Connection to the Head Modul e of CC-L ink IE Field Ne twork System[...]

  • Seite 131

    4 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4 - 1 4. HOW T O MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O S tat ion in MELSECNET/H Network System . [...]

  • Seite 132

    4 - 2 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4. HOW T O MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM This section explains the restricti ons on the connecti on methods and other information applicable when th e QCPU redundant system is monito red by the GOT . In a redundant system, the monitoring can be performed with the monito ring target specified as the control sys[...]

  • Seite 133

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION The following co nnection methods are available for the QC PU redundant syst[...]

  • Seite 134

    4 - 4 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM The following table shows the featu res of each connection method. Connection type Before system switching After system switching • Direct CPU connection (Remote I/O station of MELSECNET/H network system) • Computer link connection (Serial communication module mounted on the remote I/O station on MELSEC[...]

  • Seite 135

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION Connection type Before system switching After system switching • CC-Link c[...]

  • Seite 136

    4 - 6 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM *1 T o monitor the control system after the system switching wit hout the Q redundant setting, change th e cable connection from t he PLC CPU in the previous control system to the control system after system swit ching. *2 T o monitor the control system after the system switchi ng without the Q redundancy s[...]

  • Seite 137

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT Precautions for monitoring the QCPU redundant system (1) A[...]

  • Seite 138

    4 - 8 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O S tation in MELSECNET/ H Network System 4.1.1 Direct CPU connection (Direct CPU connec tion to the remote I/O station) This section explains the direct CPU conne ction that connec ts the GOT to the remote I/O sta[...]

  • Seite 139

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Stat ion in MELSECNET/H Networ k System 4 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.1.2 C[...]

  • Seite 140

    4 - 10 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.1 Connection to Remote I/O Station in MELSECNET/H Network System 4.1.3 Ethernet connection (Connection to Ethernet module mounted on remote I/O station) This section explains the Ethernet connecti on for connecting the GOT to the Ethernet module mounted on the remote I/ O station of the MELSECNET/H netwo[...]

  • Seite 141

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2 Direct CPU Connection This section describes [...]

  • Seite 142

    4 - 12 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4.2.2 When using two GOT s Connect a GOT to each PLC CPU to respond to the system sw itching. (1) Connection method Connect GOT s to the RS-232 interf ace of the control system and standb y system CPU modules (Q12 PRHCPU, Q25PRHCPU) of the redundant system. For details, refer to t[...]

  • Seite 143

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.2.3 Precautions when connecting a GO T di rectl[...]

  • Seite 144

    4 - 14 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection The following diagram show s an example of screen setting using SM1515. System configuration e xample: when using one GOT Create a monitor screen on the base screen 1 that perfo rms the following operations for when connecting a GOT to control system and st andby system. 1) When c[...]

  • Seite 145

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 1. Set the screen switching device of the base sc[...]

  • Seite 146

    4 - 16 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 3. Set the comment display on the base screen 1. Set a comment to be displayed on the base screen 1 depending on the system status (ON/OFF of the SM1515) of the connected PLC CPU using the Comment Displ ay (Bit). Select [Object] [Comme nt Display] [B it Comment] and set Comment Di[...]

  • Seite 147

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.2 Direct CPU Connection 4 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4. Set the touch switches on the base screen 1. B[...]

  • Seite 148

    4 - 18 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.3 CC-Link Connection (I ntelligen t Device Station) 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligent Device S tation) This section describes the CC-Link connection (intel ligent device station) that connects the GOT set as the intelligent device station to the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connec[...]

  • Seite 149

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.3 CC-Link Connection (Intelligen t Device Station) 4 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Monitoring target [...]

  • Seite 150

    4 - 20 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) 4.4 CC-Link Connection (V ia G4) This section explains the CC-Link connectio n (via G4) t hat connects the GOT to the AJ65BT -G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. The following shows an example of connecting the GO T to th e AJ65BT -G4-S3 of the CC-Link network. (1) Connection meth[...]

  • Seite 151

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.4 CC-Link Connection (Via G4) 4 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Monitoring target change when system sw[...]

  • Seite 152

    4 - 22 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Conne ctions (Network Systems) 4.5 MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 Connections (Network Systems) This section explains the MELSECNET/ H and MELSECNET/10 connections (network systems) that connect the GOT to the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network system. The following provide[...]

  • Seite 153

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.6 CC-Link IE Controller Networ k Connection (Network System) 4 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.6 CC-Link [...]

  • Seite 154

    4 - 24 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.7 Ethernet Connection 4.7 Ethernet Connection This section explains the Ethernet connecti on t hat connects the GOT to the Ethernet network system. The following shows a n example of connec ting the GOT to th e Ethernet network. (1) Connection method Connect the Ethernet n etw ork system to the GOT . For[...]

  • Seite 155

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit 4 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.8 Connection to [...]

  • Seite 156

    4 - 26 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redund ant Type Extension Base Unit 4.8.2 Ethernet connection (Connection to the Et hernet module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the Ethernet co nnection for connecting the GOT to the Et hernet module moun ted on the re dundant type extension base[...]

  • Seite 157

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redundant Type Extension Base Unit 4 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.8.3 CC-Link conn[...]

  • Seite 158

    4 - 28 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.8 Connection to the Redund ant Type Extension Base Unit 4.8.4 CC-Link connection (V ia G4) (Co nnection to the CC-Link module mounted on redundant type extension base unit) This section explains the CC-Link connectio n (Via G4) fo r connecting the GOT to the CC-Link module mo unted on the redundant type [...]

  • Seite 159

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.9 Q Redundant Setting 4 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 4.9 Q Redundant Setting The following e xplains the[...]

  • Seite 160

    4 - 30 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.9 Q Redundant Setting *1 Pair number Redundant CPU pair means the redundant CPUs (System A / System B) in the redundant system configuration. Pair number is the number assigned to each redundant CPU pair . Example: Ethernet connection (Pair No. 1 and Pair No. 2) POINT POINT POINT Precautions for making Q[...]

  • Seite 161

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 31 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 162

    4 - 32 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 1. Set the station number switching device. Select [Common] [Controller Setting] [S tation No. Switching], and set the internal device GD100 as the station number switching device. Do not use a device of PLC CPU as a screen swit[...]

  • Seite 163

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 33 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 164

    4 - 34 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function HINT HINT HINT When the MELSECNET/H network is connected to the redunda nt system only , SW56 (curr ent control station) can be set as the station number switching device. In this case, even if the system switching occurs, the G[...]

  • Seite 165

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 35 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 166

    4 - 36 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4. On the screen 1, set the switch for writing the st ation No. 1 to the st ation number switching device. After the GOT is started up, the station number switching device value of the GOT is "0". For Ethernet connecti[...]

  • Seite 167

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 37 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 168

    4 - 38 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4.10.2 Method for using the screen changing function • As a feature of this function, monitor screens are created for each station number . When the system switching occurs, the GOT can change the m onitorin g target to the co[...]

  • Seite 169

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 39 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 170

    4 - 40 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 3. Set monitor screens. For MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection o r Ethernet connection: (Common) • Create a monitor scree n with each ob ject whose network setting is S tation No. 1 on Screen No. 1 (1-1). • Crea[...]

  • Seite 171

    4. HOW TO MONITOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the C ontrol System Using the Script Function 4 - 41 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 172

    4 - 42 4. HOW TO MONI TOR REDUNTANT SYSTEM 4.10 Switch the Monitor Target to the Control System Using the Script Function 4. Change the screen switching device value in the script. By selecting [Common] [Script] [Script], create a script for each monitor screen that checks the SM1515 status of the current m onitor st ation, and if it is OFF (standb[...]

  • Seite 173

    5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5 - 1 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 2 5.[...]

  • Seite 174

    5 - 2 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When using the bus extension connecto r box, att ach it to the e x tension base unit. (Connecting it t o the main base unit is not allowed.) *2 For the multiple CPU system con[...]

  • Seite 175

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List 5 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (Continued to next page) *1 Only GT1 15 -Q BDA can be connected. *[...]

  • Seite 176

    5 - 4 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.1 Connectable Model List *1 Only GT1 15 -Q BDA can be connected. *2 Only GT1 15 -Q BDQ can be connected. *3 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later[...]

  • Seite 177

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration POINT POINT POINT When "CONTROL BU S E[...]

  • Seite 178

    5 - 6 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When 2 to 5 GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to the MELSEC-Q cat alog (L(NA)08032). *2 When installin g the GOT 13.2m or more away from the main base unit, the bus extension connector box is requi red. Attach the bus extensi on connector box to t he extension connector of th[...]

  • Seite 179

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *4 When connecting 3 or more GOT s, the overall cable length is rest[...]

  • Seite 180

    5 - 8 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration[...]

  • Seite 181

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.2.2 Connecting t o QnACPU or AnCPU  When one GOT is connected *[...]

  • Seite 182

    5 - 10 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When 2 to 3 GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 When installin g the GOT 6.6m or more away from the ma in base unit, the bus connector conversio n box is required. *3 When connecting to multiple GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, [...]

  • Seite 183

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *6 About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for [...]

  • Seite 184

    5 - 12 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5.2.3 Connection to QnASCPU or AnSCPU  When one GOT is connected Main base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Extension base unit Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Extension cable Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) PLC Connection cable 2) GOT Max. distance Extens ion base Extension cable *1 [...]

  • Seite 185

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 For details on the extension cabl es, refe r to the MELSEC-A/QnA[...]

  • Seite 186

    5 - 14 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When two GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the ma in base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *3 When connecting to multiple GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, us[...]

  • Seite 187

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *6 About the bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for [...]

  • Seite 188

    5 - 16 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When three GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 The connection of multiple GOT s When connecting to multipl e GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, use GT1 1 as a terminal. *3 The number of connectable GOT s is restricted according to[...]

  • Seite 189

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *4 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT[...]

  • Seite 190

    5 - 18 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5.2.4 Connection to A0J2HCPU *1 The number of connectable GOT s is restricted depending on the number of intell igent function modules mounted to the A0J2HCPU. 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOT s *2 When using the following functions, use GT15-ABUS(2). GT15-75 ABUS(2)L cannot be used. Used for rem[...]

  • Seite 191

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.2.5 Connection t o motion controller CPU (A273UCPU, A273UHCPU(-S3[...]

  • Seite 192

    5 - 20 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When two GOT s are connected *1 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the ma in base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *2 When connecting to multiple GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, use GT1 1 as a terminal. *3 When using GT15-C EXSS-1 or GT15-C BS, connect a[...]

  • Seite 193

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *5 The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a term[...]

  • Seite 194

    5 - 22 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When 2 to 3 GOT s are connected *2 *1 The connection of multiple GOT s When connecting to multipl e GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, use GT1 1 as a terminal. *2 The number of connectable GOT s is restricted according to the CPU type and the number of intelligent function modules. 5.4.12 W[...]

  • Seite 195

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *3 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT[...]

  • Seite 196

    5 - 24 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5.2.6 Connecting to motion controller CPU (A171SCPU(-S3(N)), A171SHCPU(N), A172SHCPU(N), A173UHCPU(-S1))  When one GOT is connected Main base unit Bus extension connector box GOT Extension base unit Connection cable 1) Connection cable 2) Extension cable Communication driver Bus(A/QnA) PLC Connec[...]

  • Seite 197

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 For details on the extension cabl es, refe r to the MELSEC-A/QnA[...]

  • Seite 198

    5 - 26 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When two GOT s are connected *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit . *3 When installing the 1st GOT 30m or more away from the ma in base unit, the bus connector conversion box is required. *4 When connecting to mult[...]

  • Seite 199

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *7 The bus connection unit GT15-75ABUSL, GT15-ABUS: Used for a term[...]

  • Seite 200

    5 - 28 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration  When 2 to 3 GOT s are connected *4 *1 For the extension cables, refer to MELSEC-A/QnA ca talog (L(NA)08024). *2 Use the A168B for the extension base unit . *3 The connection of multiple GOT s When connecting to multipl e GOT s with GT 16, GT15 and GT1 1 mixed, use GT1 1 as a terminal. *4 The num[...]

  • Seite 201

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.2 System Configuration 5 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *5 When using GT15-C BS, connect as following precautions. 5.4.1 GT[...]

  • Seite 202

    5 - 30 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 3. Set the following[...]

  • Seite 203

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5 - 31 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT (1) Communicati on interface setting by Utility The [...]

  • Seite 204

    5 - 32 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings POINT POINT POINT When connecting to motion controller CPU (Q Series) In the [Base Setting] on MT Developer , set "10" to the number of slots for the extension base used for GOT connection. HINT HINT HINT Setting unused I/O slots to empty (0 point s ) (only when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) S[...]

  • Seite 205

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.3 GOT Side Settings 5 - 33 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Other than QCPU (Q mode) Assign the GOT to an empty I/O slot on th[...]

  • Seite 206

    5 - 34 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5.4 Precautions 5.4.1 GT15-C [ ] EXSS-1, GT15-C [ ] BS (1) Composition of GT15-C EXSS-1 It is composed of GT15-EXCNB (0.5m) and GT15- C BS (10 to 30m). Calculate the cable le ngth based on GT15-C100EXSS- 1(10m), GT15-C200EXSS-1(20m) and GT15- C300EXSS-1(30m). (2) GT15-C EXSS-1 connector Connect the connector[...]

  • Seite 207

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 35 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.4.3 Powering OFF the GOT , reapplying the power (OFF to ON) (1) Precaution[...]

  • Seite 208

    5 - 36 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5.4.8 When designing the system When the GOT is OFF , the following currents are suppli ed to the GOT from the PLC CPU side (the power supply module on the mai n base unit).(The GOT does not opera te when it is OFF .) Design the system so that th e 5V DC current consumption of the modules on the main ba se u[...]

  • Seite 209

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 37 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (4) When using the QA1S6 B extension base unit A GOT is physically connected[...]

  • Seite 210

    5 - 38 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5.4.12 When connecting multiple GOT s (1) System including dif ferent GOT series The GOT1000 series can be co nnected with GOT -A900 series in a system. When using them together , refer to the fo llowing T echnica l News. Precautions when Replacing GOT - A900 Series with GOT1000 Series (GOT -A-0009) The GOT1[...]

  • Seite 211

    5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions 5 - 39 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 5.4.14 When connecting to a Q4ARCPU red undant system (1) When the GOT is bu[...]

  • Seite 212

    5 - 40 5. BUS CONNECTION 5.4 Precautions[...]

  • Seite 213

    6 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6 - 1 6. DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .[...]

  • Seite 214

    6 - 2 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List 6. DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later . *2 Access via the (RS-232) in the multiple CPU syst em. *3 Exclude the G[...]

  • Seite 215

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List 6 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (Continued to next page) *1 When connecting in direct C[...]

  • Seite 216

    6 - 4 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU, A2 C CPU or A2SCPU, only the follo w ing or later software version is used to write to the CPU. • A0J2HCPU (with/without li nk): V ersion E or later • A0J2HCPU-DC24: V ersion B or late r • A2CCPU, A2SCPU: V ersion H or later *2 W[...]

  • Seite 217

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.1 Connectable Model List 6 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 GT1 1 can not access the master stat ion on MELSECNE[...]

  • Seite 218

    6 - 6 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.1 Connecting to QCPU *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be mounte d on GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3)) *3 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection di[...]

  • Seite 219

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6.2.2 Connect ing to LCPU *1 Connect it to the RS-232 int[...]

  • Seite 220

    6 - 8 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.3 Connecting to QnACPU *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 2)) *3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the followi[...]

  • Seite 221

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6.2.4 Connect ing to ACPU *1 Connect it to the RS-232 int[...]

  • Seite 222

    6 - 10 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.5 Connecting to FXCPU  When connecting to FX 0 , FX 0S , FX 0N , FX 1 , FX 2 or FX 2C *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) *3[...]

  • Seite 223

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 1S , FX 1N , FX 2N , FX 1NC , [...]

  • Seite 224

    6 - 12 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration *6 GT14, GT12, GT1 1 and GT10 are available for the multiple-G T14 , GT12, GT1 1, GT10 connection function to connect up to two GOT s. 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION *7 When using function expansion boards or function ada pters, confirm the communication sett ing[...]

  • Seite 225

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 1S , FX 1N , FX 2N , FX 1NC , [...]

  • Seite 226

    6 - 14 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration  When connecting to FX 3G (RS-422 connection) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) *3 For details of the GOT multi-drop connectio[...]

  • Seite 227

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 3G (RS-232 connection) *1 For [...]

  • Seite 228

    6 - 16 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration  When connecting to FX 3GC (FX 3GC -/ D , F X 3GC - /DSS) (RS-422 connection) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS422 connection diagram 1)) *3 For details[...]

  • Seite 229

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 3U or FX 3UC (FX 3UC - -L T(-2[...]

  • Seite 230

    6 - 18 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration  When connecting to FX 3U or FX 3UC (FX 3UC - -L T(-2)) (RS-232 connection) *1 For details of the GOT multi-drop connection, refer to the following. 19. GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION *2 When the function expansion board (comm unicatio n board) and the functi on adapter are connected, a GOT[...]

  • Seite 231

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to FX 3UC (FX 3UC -/ D , F X 3UC -/ [...]

  • Seite 232

    6 - 20 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6.2.6 Connecting to WSCPU *1 Use the RS-232 connection model. 6.2.7 Connecting to the motion controller CPU *1 For the connection to GOT , refer to the connection diagram. ( RS232 connection diagram 3)) *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT).It cannot be mounted on GT15 5 .[...]

  • Seite 233

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.2 System Configuration 6 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT When connecting to the motion controll[...]

  • Seite 234

    6 - 22 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.3 Connection Diagr am 6.3 Connection Diagram The following diag ram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 6.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram RS232 connection diagram 1) RS232 connection diagram 2) RS232 connection diagram 3) GOT side 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 FX PLC side (D-sub 9-pin) 1 3 2 6 5 8 4 7 [...]

  • Seite 235

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.3 Connectio n Diagram 6 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length [...]

  • Seite 236

    6 - 24 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.3 Connection Diagr am  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cabl e must be within th e maximum distance specifications. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector , refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifica tions  Connecting terminating resistors [...]

  • Seite 237

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings 6 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 6.4 GOT Side Settings 6.4.1 Setting c ommunication interfac[...]

  • Seite 238

    6 - 26 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings *1 This is effective when collecting a large data on oth er than the monitor screen (logging, recip e function, etc.). Howe ver , when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the i nfluence on the sequence scan time, do not set "High&[...]

  • Seite 239

    6. DIRECT CONNE CTION TO CPU 6.4 GOT Side Settings 6 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (4) MELSE C-A (GT10) (5) MELSEC-WS POINT POINT POINT (1) Co[...]

  • Seite 240

    6 - 28 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 6.5 Precautions 6.5 Precautions  Connection to FXCPU (1) When connecting to FX 3G /FX 3GC /FX 3U /FX 3UC series When the keyword of FXCPU (FX 3G /FX 3GC /FX 3U / FX 3UC series) has been set, GOT may not be able to monitoring.Perform an I/O ch eck again. ( ■ Perform an I/O check) When the result of the I/ O ch[...]

  • Seite 241

    7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7 - 1 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . [...]

  • Seite 242

    7 - 2 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. 7.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later . *2 For GT10, do not include in the multip[...]

  • Seite 243

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (Continued to next page) *1 Use only modules with the up[...]

  • Seite 244

    7 - 4 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 The computer link module version U or later supports the A2SCP U(S1), A2SHCPU(S1), A1SHCPU, A1SJHCPU and A0J2HCPU. In addition, A0J2-C214-S 1 (A0J2HCPU-dedicated computer link module) canno t be used. *2 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller[...]

  • Seite 245

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 GT1 1 can not access the master stat ion on MELSECNET[...]

  • Seite 246

    7 - 6 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.1 Connectable Model List 7.1.2 Serial communication module/Computer link module *1 Communication cannot be performed with RS-485. A0J2-C214-S1 cannot be used. *2 Either CH1 or CH2 can be used for the function version A. Both CH1 and CH2 can be used together for the function version B or later . *3 Only CH2 can be[...]

  • Seite 247

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7.2.1 Connect ing to QCPU (Q mode[...]

  • Seite 248

    7 - 8 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7.2.2 Connecting to LCPU *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. MELSEC-L Serial Communication Module User' s Manual (Basic) *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT165[...]

  • Seite 249

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.2.3 Connect ing to QCPU (A mode) *1 For the system confi[...]

  • Seite 250

    7 - 10 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7.2.4 Connecting to QnACPU (QnACPU type) *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Serial Communications Module Use r ’s Manu al (Modem Function Additional V ersion) *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built int[...]

  • Seite 251

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 For the system configuration on the computer link modu[...]

  • Seite 252

    7 - 12 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.2 System Configuration *1 For details on the system configuration on the serial communication module side, refer to the following manual. Serial Communication Module User's Manual (Mode m Function Additional V ersion) For the system configuration on the comput er link module side, refer to the following ma[...]

  • Seite 253

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.2.6 Connect ing to ACPU (AnCPU t ype) *1 For the system[...]

  • Seite 254

    7 - 14 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.2 System Configuration 7.2.7 Connecting to ACPU (AnS CPU type, A0J2HCPU, A2CCPUC) *1 For the system configuration on the computer link module side, refer to the following manual. Computer Link Module (Com. link func./Print . func.) User’s Manual *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It canno[...]

  • Seite 255

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.3 Connectio n Diagram 7 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.3 Connection Diagram The following dia gram shows the co[...]

  • Seite 256

    7 - 16 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.3 Connection Diagr am  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length o f the RS-232 cable must be 15m or le ss. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector , refe r to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifica tions RS232 connection diagram 3) PLC side connector D-sub 9-pin For GT1[...]

  • Seite 257

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.3 Connectio n Diagram 7 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.3.2 RS-422 c able  Connection diagram  Precautions[...]

  • Seite 258

    7 - 18 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.3 Connection Diagr am  Connecting terminating resistors (1) GOT side When connecting a PL C to the GOT , a terminati ng resistor must be connected to the GOT . (a) For GT16, GT15, GT12 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". (b) For GT14, GT1 1, GT10 Set the t[...]

  • Seite 259

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings 7 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings 7.4.1 Setting c ommunication interface[...]

  • Seite 260

    7 - 20 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings *1 This is effective when collecting a large data on oth er than the monitor screen (logging, recip e function, etc.). Howe ver , when connecting to Q00J/Q00/Q01CPU, the sequence scan time may be influenced. If you want to avoid the i nfluence on the sequence scan time, do not set "High[...]

  • Seite 261

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.4 GOT Side Settings 7 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) AJ71C24/UC24 (4) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) POINT POINT POINT (1[...]

  • Seite 262

    7 - 22 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7.5 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates un der the following transmission specifications when it i s con nected to a Mitsubishi PLC in the computer link connection. The PLC side settings (the serial communicatio n module, computer link modul e) are ex pla ined in Section 7.5.1 to Section 7.5.3.[...]

  • Seite 263

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) When connecting to the CH2 side *1 The module operates un[...]

  • Seite 264

    7 - 24 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7.5.2 Connecting serial communication module (QnA Series) POINT POINT POINT Serial communication module (QnA Series) For details of the serial communication module (QnA Series), refer to the following manu al. Serial Communication Module User' s Manual (Modem Function Additional Version)[...]

  • Seite 265

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (a) T ransmission spee d setting (SW09 to SW12) Set the trans[...]

  • Seite 266

    7 - 26 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting (1) Mode setting switch (2) T ransmission specifications switch (a) AJ71UC24 • Transmission speed setting (SW13 to SW 15) Set the transmission speed (SW 13 to SW15) as follows. The transmission speed setting must be consiste nt with that of the GOT side. *1 Only transmission speeds availabl[...]

  • Seite 267

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting 7 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION • T ra nsmission speed setting (SW05 to SW07) Set the trans[...]

  • Seite 268

    7 - 28 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.5 PLC Side Setting POINT POINT POINT When connecting the GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT 10 and the computer link unit When the GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 and the computer link unit are conne cted via RS-232C, set the buffer memory in the computer li nk un it using the sequence program so that CD signals are not checked. Ex[...]

  • Seite 269

    7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 7.6 Precautions 7 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 7.6 Precautions  T ime taken until the PLC runs wh en connected[...]

  • Seite 270

    7 - 30 7. COMPUTER LINK CONN ECTION 7.6 Precautions[...]

  • Seite 271

    8 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8 - 1 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 -[...]

  • Seite 272

    8 - 2 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later . *2 Use a module with the upper five digit s later t[...]

  • Seite 273

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8 - 3 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (Continued to next page) *1 If the A series Ethernet module i[...]

  • Seite 274

    8 - 4 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modules with the following pro duct n[...]

  • Seite 275

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8 - 5 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION *1 The supported version of the main units varies dependi ng [...]

  • Seite 276

    8 - 6 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.1 Connectable Model List 8.1.2 Ethernet module *1 If the A series Ethernet module is applied to the QnAC PU, the GOT can monitor the de vices as the same as the case of AnACPU. However , the following devices cannot be moni tored. • Devices added to QnACPU • Latch relays (L) and step relays (S) (In case of QnACPU,[...]

  • Seite 277

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 7 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8.2.1 Connect ion to Ethernet module ?[...]

  • Seite 278

    8 - 8 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration *3 A length between a hub and a node. The maximum distance dif fers depending on the Ethernet device to be used. The following shows the number of th e connec table nodes when a repeater hub is used. • 10BASE-T : Max. 4 nodes for a cascade connection (500m) • 100BASE-TX: Max. 2 nodes for a c[...]

  • Seite 279

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 9 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  When connecting to MELSEC-FX *1 The destination connected w[...]

  • Seite 280

    8 - 10 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration *6 When using an Ethernet module with the FX 3UC series, FX 2NC -CNV -IF or FX 3UC -1PS-5V is required. *7 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. *8 When using an Ethernet module with the FX 3U series, F X 3U -CNV -BD, FX 3U -422-BD, or FX 3U [...]

  • Seite 281

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 11 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2.2 Connection t o Built-in Ethernet port CPU or C Controlle[...]

  • Seite 282

    8 - 12 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8.2.3 Connecting to Display I/F *1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet net work system . Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other syst em equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system[...]

  • Seite 283

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8 - 13 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2.4 Connect ion to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter[...]

  • Seite 284

    8 - 14 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.2 System Configuration 8.2.5 Connecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (B uilt-in Ethernet port Motion Cont roller CPU) *1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet net work system . Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other syst em equipment cor[...]

  • Seite 285

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8 - 15 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8.3.1 Setting c ommunication interface (Com[...]

  • Seite 286

    8 - 16 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings *1 T o connect the GOT with the Etherne t module (Q Series) in the one-on-one relation ship using a cross cable, set [T imeout Time] to 6sec. or longer . *2 Click the [Setting] button an d perform the sett ing in the [GO T IP Address Setting] screen.  GT15 *1 T o connect the GOT with the Ethern[...]

  • Seite 287

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8 - 17 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT (1) Exa mple of [Detail setting]. For examples [...]

  • Seite 288

    8 - 18 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings POINT POINT POINT (1) E xample of [Ethernet setting] For examples of [Ethernet setting], refer to the following. 8.4 PLC Side Setti ng (2) Parameter reflection functi on of MELSOFT Navigator (a) The color of the cells for the items which are reflected to GT Designer3 from MELSOFT Navigator changes[...]

  • Seite 289

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.3 GOT Side Settings 8 - 19 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION POINT POINT POINT (1) Routing parameter setting of relay station [...]

  • Seite 290

    8 - 20 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.1 Connect ing to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (one-to-one connection) This section descri bes the settings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in the following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethe rnet port CPU For details of Built[...]

  • Seite 291

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 21 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  [Controller Setting] and [Et hernet] of GT Designer3 POINT POI[...]

  • Seite 292

    8 - 22 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.2 Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (multiple connection) This section describes th e sett ings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port CPU in t he following case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU For details of Built-in Ether net port CPU,[...]

  • Seite 293

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 23 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Open settings The setting is re quired for all the con nected [...]

  • Seite 294

    8 - 24 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  Checking communication state of Connecting to Built-in Ethernet port CPU (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows  . Execute a Ping command at the Command Prompt of Windows  . (a) When normal communication C:>Ping 192.168.0.1 Reply from 192.168.0.1: bytes= 32 time <10ms TTL=32 [...]

  • Seite 295

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 25 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  [Network parameter] of GX Developer (1) Network parameter : Ne[...]

  • Seite 296

    8 - 26 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting (3) Routing pa rameter setting Up to 64 [ Transfe r Network No.]s can be s et. However , the same transfer network n umber cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that ca n access to other station from the request source host GO T is 64 kind s of [T ransfer Network No.]s. P[...]

  • Seite 297

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 27 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Confirming the communication st ate of Ethernet module (1) Whe[...]

  • Seite 298

    8 - 28 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  Utility setting for C Controller module (1) Q12DCCPU-V Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E V er .3.05F or later for the C Controller setting utility . (a) Co nnection settings : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP addre [...]

  • Seite 299

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 29 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (d) System settings : Necessary : As necess ary : Not necessary (2[...]

  • Seite 300

    8 - 30 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting (1) Controller setting (2) Ethernet setting *1 Set the same value as that o f GOT N/W No. *2 Set a value different fr om that of the GOT PLC No. and the PLC No. of other PLCs on the sa me network.  Checking communication state of C Controller m odule (1) When using the Command Prompt of Windows [...]

  • Seite 301

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 31 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Switch settings of Ethernet module Set the operation mode sett[...]

  • Seite 302

    8 - 32 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  [Network p arameter] of GX Developer (1) Network p arameter : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT . *2 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT . POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network pa[...]

  • Seite 303

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 33 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Communication confirmation The RDY LED on the Ethernet module [...]

  • Seite 304

    8 - 34 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  Switch settings of Ethernet module Set the operation mode setting switch and exchange condition setting switch. *2 The figure of AJ71E71N3-T and A1SJ71E71N3-T . (1) Operation mode setting switch : Necessary : As necess ary : Not necessary (2) Exchange condition setting switch *1 : Necessary : A[...]

  • Seite 305

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 35 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Sequence program The sequence program for initia l processing [...]

  • Seite 306

    8 - 36 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Example of sequence program POINT POINT POINT When changing the sequence p rogram After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether tu rning OFF and then ON or resetting. IP address of Ethernet module(192.168.0.19) Initial request COM. ERR turned off request Clear the[...]

  • Seite 307

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 37 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (3) Communication confirmation The RDY LED on the Ethernet module [...]

  • Seite 308

    8 - 38 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.7 Connecting to Ethernet module (FX Series) This section describes the settings of the GOT and Ethernet module (FX Series) in the following ca se of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Ethernet module (FX Se ries) For details of the Ethernet module (FX Series), refer to the following ma[...]

  • Seite 309

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 39 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Operational settings :Required :Set if necessary :Not required[...]

  • Seite 310

    8 - 40 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting  Ethernet parameter settings of FX 3U -ENET - ADP (1) Ethernet settings Set the Ethernet parameter at [FX Parameter] on GX Work s2. T o set FX 3U -ENET -ADP , GX Works2 V er .1.90U or l ater is required. For details on the setting of FX 3U -ENET- ADP , refer to the following manu al. FX 3U -ENET[...]

  • Seite 311

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 41 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  [Controller Setting] and [Et hernet] of GT Designer3 (1) Contr[...]

  • Seite 312

    8 - 42 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.8 Connecting to Display I/F (CNC C70) This section describes the sett ings of the GOT and Display I/F (CNC C70) in the foll owing case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT Display I/F (CNC C70) For details of the Display I/F (CNC C70), refer to the following manual. C70 Series SET UP [...]

  • Seite 313

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 43 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION (2) Ethernet setting POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] and [E[...]

  • Seite 314

    8 - 44 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.9 Connecting to CC-Link IE Field Network Ethernet Adapter Module This section describes the se ttings of the GOT , Ethernet adapter modu le and the PLC in the following system configuration.  System configuration *1 Set the GOT network No. according to the third octet (network No.) of the Et[...]

  • Seite 315

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 45 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION  Ethernet Adapter Module setting Set the parameter with the Eth[...]

  • Seite 316

    8 - 46 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8.4.10 C onnecting to PERIPHERAL I/F (Built-in Ethernet port Motion Controller CPU) This section describes th e sett ings of the GOT and Built-in Ethernet port Motion Contro lle r CPU in the following case of system co nfiguration. POINT POINT POINT (1) GOT type setting For details, refer to the fo[...]

  • Seite 317

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting 8 - 47 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION : Necessary : As necess ary : Not necessary (2) Open settings The [...]

  • Seite 318

    8 - 48 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.4 PLC Side Setting POINT POINT POINT Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer Ethernet diagnostics of GX Works2/GX Developer is available to a Ping test from the PLC. For details of Ethernet diagnosti cs of GX Works2/GX Developer , refe r to the following manual. GX Works2 V ersion1 Operating Manu al (Common) G[...]

  • Seite 319

    8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.5 Precautions 8 - 49 1 PREP ARA TORY PROCEDURES FOR MONITORING 2 DEVICE RANGE THA T CAN BE SET 3 ACCESS RANGE FOR MONITORING 4 HOW TO MONIT OR REDUNT ANT SYSTEM 5 BUS CONNECTION 6 DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU 7 COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 8 ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.5 Precautions  Connection to QnA (S) CPU type Use B or a late r fu[...]

  • Seite 320

    8 - 50 8. ETHERNET CONNECTION 8.5 Precautions  When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP address. (Numbers of *.*.*.0 and *. *.*.255 are used by the system) The GOT may n ot monitor the controller correctly with the above numbers. Consult with the administra to r of the network before setting an IP [...]

  • Seite 321

    9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 9 - 1 9. MELSECNET/H CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 322

    9 - 2 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC T O PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List POINT POINT POINT (1) Connectable network When using MELSECNET/H in NET/10 mode, refer to MELSECNET/10 CONN ECTION. Connect the GOT to the following netw ork systems as an ordinary station. • M[...]

  • Seite 323

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I[...]

  • Seite 324

    9 - 4 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modules with [...]

  • Seite 325

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I[...]

  • Seite 326

    9 - 6 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.1 Connectable Model List 9.1.2 MELSECNET/H network module *1 Use function version B or later of the MELSECNET/H net work module and CPU. CPU series Model name Optical loop Coaxial bus MELSEC-Q (Q mode) *1 MELSEC-QS Motion controller CPU (Q Series) CNC C70 Robot controller (CRnQ-700) QJ71LP21 QJ[...]

  • Seite 327

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.2 System Configuration 9 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INV[...]

  • Seite 328

    9 - 8 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.2 System Configuration *3 For the coaxial cable, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MEL SECNET/H Network System Reference Manual (PL C to PLC network) For the coaxial cable conne ctor connec tion me thod, refer to the foll owing. 1.4.2 Coaxial cable connector co nnection method *4 T[...]

  • Seite 329

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.3 GOT Side Settings 9 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERT[...]

  • Seite 330

    9 - 10 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system. *2 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network Syst em Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) POINT POINT POINT (1) C ommunication interface setting by Utility The communication interface set[...]

  • Seite 331

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER[...]

  • Seite 332

    9 - 12 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings (1) S tation number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Do not set the same station No. as that of the GOT . (2) Mode setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *2 Set the same mode setting and tran smission speed as those of the GO[...]

  • Seite 333

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER[...]

  • Seite 334

    9 - 14 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings  Connecting to C Con troller module Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E V er .3.05F or later for the MELSECNET/H utility . (1) Connection settings : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, input the changed IP addre s s o[...]

  • Seite 335

    9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.4 PLC Side Settings 9 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER[...]

  • Seite 336

    9 - 16 9. MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 9.5 Precautions 9.5 Precautions  Network configuration Use MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC netwo rk) to configur e a network inclu d ing the GOT . The following networks including the GOT canno t be configur ed. • MELSECNET/H (Remote I/O network)  Network type setting • S peci fy all the netwo[...]

  • Seite 337

    10 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 10 - 1 10. MELSECNET/10 CO[...]

  • Seite 338

    10 - 2 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List 10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC T O PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connect able Model List POINT POINT POINT (1) Connectable network The MELSECNET/10 connecti on includes the MELSECNE T/H network system used in the MELSECNET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connect ed to the re mote[...]

  • Seite 339

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectab le Model List 10 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)[...]

  • Seite 340

    10 - 4 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC-A (AnCPU) A2UCPU MELSECNET/10 10.2 A2UCPU-S1 A3UCPU A4UCPU A2ACPU - - A2ACPUP21 A2ACPUR21 A2ACPU-S1 A2ACPUP21-S1 A2ACPUR21-S1 A3ACPU A3ACPUP21 A3ACPUR21 A1NCPU A1NCPUP21 A1NCP UR21 [...]

  • Seite 341

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectab le Model List 10 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)[...]

  • Seite 342

    10 - 6 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.1 Connectable Model List 10.1.2 M ELSECNET/H (NET/10 mode), MELSECNET/10 network module *1 Use function version B or later of the CPU and MELSECNET/H net work module. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC-FX FX 0 - - FX 0S FX 0N FX 1 FX 2 - FX 2C FX 1S - FX 1N FX 2N FX[...]

  • Seite 343

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.2 System Configuration 10 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 344

    10 - 8 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.2 System Configuration 10.2.2 C onnecting to the coaxial bus system *1 Use a PLC CPU and MELSECNET/H network module of function ver s ion B or lat er . *2 For the system configuration of the MELSECNET/H and MELSECNET/10 network module, refer to the following manuals. Q corresponding MELSEC[...]

  • Seite 345

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings 10 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 346

    10 - 10 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Cannot be set for the QCPU redundant system. *2 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MELSECNET/H Network Syst em Reference Manual (PLC to PLC network) (2) MELSECNET/10 POINT POINT POINT (1) When MELSECNET/H communication unit is used When conn[...]

  • Seite 347

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.3 GOT Side Settings 10 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I[...]

  • Seite 348

    10 - 12 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10.4.1 Connecting to MELSECNET/H network module This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSECNET/H network module in the following case of system configuration. When connecting the MELSECNET /H network module to the MELSECNET/10 network[...]

  • Seite 349

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 350

    10 - 14 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (b) Network range assignment : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. *2 Set it when the MEL SECNET/H network module is used i n the redundant QnPRHCPU system. POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parame[...]

  • Seite 351

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 352

    10 - 16 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (b) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [T ransfer Network No.]s can be set. However , the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that c an access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [T r[...]

  • Seite 353

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 354

    10 - 18 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (1) Network number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same network No. as that of the GOT . (2) Group number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (3) S tation number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary [...]

  • Seite 355

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 19 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 356

    10 - 20 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Network range assignment : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning [...]

  • Seite 357

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 21 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 358

    10 - 22 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting  Switch setting of MELSECNET/10 network module Set for each setting switch. (1) Network number setting switch : Necessar y : As nec e ssary : Not necessary *1 Specify the sa me network No. as that of the GOT . *2 Do not specify a number between 240 and 255. (2) Group[...]

  • Seite 359

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 23 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 360

    10 - 24 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Network range assignment : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Be sure to set it to perform the cyclic transmission. POINT POINT POINT When changing the network parameter After writing the network parameter to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether turning [...]

  • Seite 361

    10. MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.4 PLC Side Setting 10 - 25 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 362

    10 - 26 10. MELSECN ET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10.5 Precautions 10.5 Precautions  Network configuration Use the MELSECNET/10 m ode of MELSECNET/H (PLC to PLC network) or MELSECNET/10 (PLC to PLC network) to configure a net work in cluding the GOT . (1) The following networks inclu ding the GOT cannot be configur ed. • MELSECNET/10 ([...]

  • Seite 363

    11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLIF IER CONNECTION 11 - 1 11. CC-Link IE CONT[...]

  • Seite 364

    11 - 2 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 Connectable Model List 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 Connectable Model List 1 1.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later[...]

  • Seite 365

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 C onnectable Model List 11 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)[...]

  • Seite 366

    11 - 4 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 Only the first step can be used on the ext ension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). Series Model name Clock Communicati on type Refer to MELSEC-A (AnSCPU) A2USCPU - - A2USCPU-S1 A2USHCPU-S1 A1SCPU A1SCPUC24-R2 A1SHCPU A2SCPU A2SCPU-S1 A2SHCPU A2SHCPU[...]

  • Seite 367

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 C onnectable Model List 11 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)[...]

  • Seite 368

    11 - 6 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.1 Connectable Model List 1 1.1.2 CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit *1 When the CC-Link IE Controller Network is in the extended mode, use a unit with the upper five digit s of the serial No. 12052 or later . CPU series CC-Link IE Controller Network communication unit *1 MELSEC[...]

  • Seite 369

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.2 System Configuration 11 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 370

    11 - 8 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.3 GOT side settings 1 1.3 GOT side settings 1 1.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of connectin g equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from th[...]

  • Seite 371

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.3 GO T side settings 11 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I[...]

  • Seite 372

    11 - 1 0 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC- Link IE controller network mo dule in the followi ng case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link IE Controller Network module For details of the CC-Link IE Controller Network module[...]

  • Seite 373

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 IN[...]

  • Seite 374

    11 - 1 2 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [T ransfer Network No.]s can be set. However , the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that c an access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [T ra[...]

  • Seite 375

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 1 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I[...]

  • Seite 376

    11 - 1 4 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting (c) Routing parameter setting Up to 64 [T ransfer Network No.]s can be set. However , the same transfer network number cannot be set twice or more (multiple times). Therefore, the one that c an access to other station from the request source host GOT is 64 kinds of [T ra[...]

  • Seite 377

    1 1. CC-L ink IE CONTROLLER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.4 PLC Side Setting 11 - 1 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETW ORK ) 11 CC-Link IE CONTROL LER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CO NNECTI ON (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 I[...]

  • Seite 378

    11 - 1 6 1 1. CC-Link IE CONTROLL ER NETWORK CONNECTION 1 1.5 Precautions 1 1.5 Precautions  GOT startup in CC-Link IE Controller Network connection For the CC-Link IE Controller Network connection, the data link is started approximately 13 seconds after the GOT startup.  When a network error occurs in the syste m alarm In the CC-Link IE Cont[...]

  • Seite 379

    12 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 12 - 1 12. CC-Link IE FIEL[...]

  • Seite 380

    12 - 2 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connect able Model List 12.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSEC-Q (Q mode) Q00JCPU - - Q00CPU *1 Q01C[...]

  • Seite 381

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectab le Model List 12 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER[...]

  • Seite 382

    12 - 4 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 Only the first step can be used on the ext ension base unit (Q52B/Q55B). *2 For the PLC CPU area, use a module with the upper five digits later th an 12012. Only the PLC CPU area can be monitored. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer [...]

  • Seite 383

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectab le Model List 12 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER[...]

  • Seite 384

    12 - 6 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.1 Connectable Model List 12.1.2 CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit CPU series CC-Link IE Field Network communication unit MELSEC-Q(Universal mod el) QJ71GF1 1-T2, QD77GF16 MELSEC-L LJ71GF1 1-T2 MELSEC-QS QS0J71GF1 1-T2[...]

  • Seite 385

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.2 System Configuration 12 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 386

    12 - 8 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.3 GOT side settings 12.3 GOT side settings 12.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of connectin g equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list me[...]

  • Seite 387

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.3 GOT side settings 12 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CO[...]

  • Seite 388

    12 - 10 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting 12.4 PLC Side Setting This section describes the settings of the GOT and CC- Link IE controller network mo dule in the followi ng case of system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Link IE Field Network Module For details of the CC-Link IE F ield Network module, refer to the fol[...]

  • Seite 389

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting 12 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CO[...]

  • Seite 390

    12 - 12 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.4 PLC Side Setting  GT Designer3 [Communication settings] of System configuration (Network T ype: CC IE Field) POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Setting ] of GT Designer3, refer to the following. 12.3.1 Setti ng communication int erface[...]

  • Seite 391

    12. CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.5 Precau tions 12 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 392

    12 - 14 12. C C-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 12.5 Precautions[...]

  • Seite 393

    13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 13 - 1 13. CC-Link CONNECT[...]

  • Seite 394

    13 - 2 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List 13 . CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 13.1 Connect able Model List 13.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function vers[...]

  • Seite 395

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectab le Model List 13 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via [...]

  • Seite 396

    13 - 4 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modu[...]

  • Seite 397

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.1 Connectab le Model List 13 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via [...]

  • Seite 398

    13 - 6 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 13.2 System Configuration 13.2.1 Connecting with CC-Link V er .1 compatible *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the followin g manuals. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT1 1N Control & Communication Link S[...]

  • Seite 399

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 13 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4)[...]

  • Seite 400

    13 - 8 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.2 System Configuration 13.2.3 Connecting with CC-Link V er .1/V er . 2 compatibles mixed *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the followin g manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT1 1N *2 For the specifications and inquiries of th[...]

  • Seite 401

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings 13 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 402

    13 - 10 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Transmission speed settings The following list s the transmission speed settings of the CC- Link communication. For details of the hard ware test, refer to the fol lowing manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link mod ule to be use[...]

  • Seite 403

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.3 GOT Side Settings 13 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 1[...]

  • Seite 404

    13 - 12 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13.4 PLC Side Setting The GOT operates as the stations of which are shown below in the CC-Link system. The switch settings and parame ter settings of the PLC side (CC-Link module) are described in 13.4.1 to 13.4.7. HINT HINT HINT Number of stations occupied The numb[...]

  • Seite 405

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 406

    13 - 14 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  Parameter setting (when connect i ng to MELSEC-Q or QS series) (1) [Network p arameter] of GX Developer (a) Network parameter : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (b) S tation information setting : Necessar y : As nec e ssary : Not necessary *1 When the [[...]

  • Seite 407

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 408

    13 - 16 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used (2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Se[...]

  • Seite 409

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 410

    13 - 18 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (b) St a tion information setting : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 When the [Mode] of the CC-Link module is set at [Remote net - (V er . 2 mode)], [Remote station point s] can be set. [Remote sta tion points] is a setting for the remot e I/O station. T[...]

  • Seite 411

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 19 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 412

    13 - 20 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13.4.3 Connecting to CC-Link module (Q Series) with V er .1/V er .2 compatibles mixed This section de scribes the setting of the GOT and CC-L ink module (Q Series) with V er .1/V er .2 compatibles mixed in the following system configuration. POINT POINT POINT CC-Lin[...]

  • Seite 413

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 21 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 414

    13 - 22 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  Parameter setting (when connect ing to C Controller m odule) Use SW3PVC-CCPU-E V er .3.05F or later for the CC- Link utility . (1) Connection settings : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 If the IP address of the C Controller module has been changed, i[...]

  • Seite 415

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 23 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 416

    13 - 24 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13.4.4 Connecting to MELSEC-L series with CC-Link V er .1 compatible This section describes the settings of the GOT and MELSEC-L in the follo wing case of the system configuration. POINT POINT POINT (1) C C-Link module (L Series) For det ails of the CC-Link module ([...]

  • Seite 417

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 25 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 418

    13 - 26 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  [Network p arameter] of GX Developer (1) Network p arameter : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Set the S tart I/O No. o f the CC-Link module according t o the system configuration. (2) S tation information setting : Necessar y : As nec e ssary : Not [...]

  • Seite 419

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 27 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 420

    13 - 28 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (3) T ransmission speed setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 Specify the same transmission speed as that of the GOT . (4) Condition setting switches : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *2 Will be valid when the CC-Link module is the [...]

  • Seite 421

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 29 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 422

    13 - 30 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (d) E xample of sequence p rogram POINT POINT POINT When changing the sequence p rogram After writing the sequence program to the PLC CPU, operate the PLC CPU ether tu rning OFF and then ON or resetting. Data link startup normal completion (buffer memory) Data link [...]

  • Seite 423

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 31 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 424

    13 - 32 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  Settings of CC-Link module (A Series) Set for each setting switch. (1) S tation number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (2) Mode setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (3) T ransmission speed setting switch : Necessa[...]

  • Seite 425

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 33 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 426

    13 - 34 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (c) Example of sequence program (CC-Link de dicated instruction) (Continued to next page) * Setting of network parameter with dedicated RLP A instruction * Setting of automatic refresh parameter with dedicated RRP A instruction Module ready Module error Module ready[...]

  • Seite 427

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 35 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 428

    13 - 36 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting (2) Program condition (for FROM/T O instruction) This program writes p arameters to the buffer memory when PLC CPU status changes from STOP to RUN and automatically starts the data link with FROM/TO instruction. (a) I/O signal of CC-Link module Control & Communi[...]

  • Seite 429

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting 13 - 37 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15[...]

  • Seite 430

    13 - 38 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.4 PLC Side Setting  [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 (1) When MODEL GT15-J61BT13 CC-Link communication unit is used (2) When MODEL GT15-75J61BT13-Z CC-Link communication unit is used POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] of GT Designer3 For the setting method of [Controller Se[...]

  • Seite 431

    13. CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.5 Precau tions 13 - 39 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONN ECTION (INTELLIGENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INV[...]

  • Seite 432

    13 - 40 13. C C-Link CONNECTION (INT ELLIGENT DEVICE STATION) 13.5 Precautions  Connection to Q170MCPU Set [CPU No.] to "2" in the device setting to monito r the device of the Motion CPU area (CPU No.2). When the CPU No. is set to "0 " or "1", the device on the PLC CPU area (CPU No.1) is monitored. When the CPU No .[...]

  • Seite 433

    14 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 14 - 1 14. CC-Link CONNECT[...]

  • Seite 434

    14 - 2 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (V ia G4) 14.1 Connect able Model List 14.1.1 PLC/Motion controller CPU The following table shows the conne ctable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU function version B or later . *2 Only master station can[...]

  • Seite 435

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectab le Model List 14 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONN[...]

  • Seite 436

    14 - 4 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00H or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modules with the followin[...]

  • Seite 437

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.1 Connectab le Model List 14 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONN[...]

  • Seite 438

    14 - 6 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.2 System Configuration 14.2 System Configuration 14.2.1 Connecting to QCPU (Q mode) *1 For the system configuration of the CC-Link module, refer to the followin g manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual QJ61BT1 1N *2 For the specifications and inquiries of the CC-Link dedicat ed cable[...]

  • Seite 439

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.2 System Configuration 14 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECT[...]

  • Seite 440

    14 - 8 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.3 Connection Diagram 14.3 Connection Diagram The following diag ram shows the connection between the GOT and the PLC. 14.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-232 cabl e must be 15m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT s[...]

  • Seite 441

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.4 GOT Side Settings 14 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION[...]

  • Seite 442

    14 - 10 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.4 GOT Side Settings HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal devi ce, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setti[...]

  • Seite 443

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTIO[...]

  • Seite 444

    14 - 12 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings (3) Operation setting DIP switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 The peripheral connection module operates with the baud rate set in the GOT . 14.5.6 [Controller Se tting] of GT Designer3 POINT POINT POINT Operation mode of peripheral connecti on module Be sure to set th[...]

  • Seite 445

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTIO[...]

  • Seite 446

    14 - 14 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14.5.3 Switch setting of CC-Link module (Q series) Set the station numb er setting switch, transmission speed / mode setting switch. (1) S tation number setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary (2) T ransmission rate/mode setting switch : Necessary : As nece ssary : N[...]

  • Seite 447

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings 14 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTIO[...]

  • Seite 448

    14 - 16 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.5 PLC Side Settings (2) [Parameter Set ting] of CC-Link utility (a) Network parameter : Necessary : As nece ssary : Not necessary *1 If the CC-Link module [Mode] is [Remote net -V er .1 mode], [Remote statio n points] ca nnot be set. *2 Set the same setting as that of the GOT . POINT POINT POINT When chan[...]

  • Seite 449

    14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.6 Precau tions 14 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 [...]

  • Seite 450

    14 - 18 14. C C-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 14.6 Precautions[...]

  • Seite 451

    MITSUBISHI F A DEVICE CONNECTIONS 15. INVERTER CO NNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 - 1 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNE CTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 1 18. CNC CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 1[...]

  • Seite 452

    [...]

  • Seite 453

    15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 15 - 1 15. INVER TER CONNE[...]

  • Seite 454

    15 - 2 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.1 Connectable Model List 15. INVER TER CONNECTION 15.1 Connect able Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to FREQROL FREQROL-A500/A500L RS-422 15.2.1 FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 RS-422 15.2.2 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F[...]

  • Seite 455

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 456

    15 - 4 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration  When connecting to multiple inverter s (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter . *3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTRIC CO., L [...]

  • Seite 457

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 458

    15 - 6 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration  When connecting to multiple inverters (Max. 31) (Using the computer link o p tion) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 For GT1 1 and GT10, the number of connectable inve rters differs according to the hard ware version. Fo[...]

  • Seite 459

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 460

    15 - 8 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration  When connecting to multiple inverter s (Max. 31) (Using the distributor) *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter . *3 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTR IC CO., L[...]

  • Seite 461

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 462

    15 - 10 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15.2.3 Connecting to FREQROL E700  When connecting to one inverter *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter . *3 The control terminal option and the PU port cannot be used at the same time[...]

  • Seite 463

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 [...]

  • Seite 464

    15 - 12 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D GT1030-H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020-L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hard w are version Number of connect able Inverter[...]

  • Seite 465

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 [...]

  • Seite 466

    15 - 14 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15.2.4 Connecting to FR EQROL-A700/F700/700P  When connecting to one inverter *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . FREQROL 500/700 Communication driver Inverter GOT Connection cable Inverter Connection cable GO T Number of con[...]

  • Seite 467

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 [...]

  • Seite 468

    15 - 16 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration GT1055-QSBD GT1050-QBBD C or later 31 B or earlier 10 GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D GT1030-H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020-L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hard w are version Number of connect able Inverter[...]

  • Seite 469

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 [...]

  • Seite 470

    15 - 18 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15.2.5 Connecting to MD-CX522- K (-A0)  When connecting to one inverter *1 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into GOT). It cannot be moun ted on GT1655 and GT155 . *2 Connect to the PU port of the inverter . FREQROL 500/700 Communication driver Inverter GOT Connection cable Invert[...]

  • Seite 471

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration 15 - 19 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 [...]

  • Seite 472

    15 - 20 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.2 System Configuration GT1045-QSBD GT1040-QBBD A or later 31 GT1030-L D GT1030-H D B or later 31 A or earlier 10 GT1020-L D E or later 31 D or earlier 10 Model name Hard w are version Number of connect able Inverter[...]

  • Seite 473

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Conne ction Diagram 15 - 21 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 474

    15 - 22 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram *1 Connect a terminating resistor jumper to RDB and RDR which are assigned in t he FR-A5NR of the inverter located far thest from the GOT . The terminating resister jumper is packed together with the FR-A 5NR. *2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be [...]

  • Seite 475

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Conne ction Diagram 15 - 23 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 476

    15 - 24 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram *1 Turn ON (100 ) the terminator switch for the most distant FR-E7TR fro m the GOT . *2 For GT16, GT15 and GT12, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a terminal, to "Enable". For GT14, GT1 1 and GT10, set the terminating resistor of GOT side, which will be a termin[...]

  • Seite 477

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Conne ction Diagram 15 - 25 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 478

    15 - 26 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram *1 Set the terminator switch built in the farthest invert er from the GOT to ON (100 ). *2 Set the terminating resistor of GO T side, which will be a terminal, to "330 ". 1.4.3 T erminating resistors of GOT *1 Set the terminating resistor of the GOT side to "330 ". 1.4.3 T [...]

  • Seite 479

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Conne ction Diagram 15 - 27 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 480

    15 - 28 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.3 Connection Diagram  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length of the RS-422 cabl e must be 500m or less. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector , refer to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifica tions (3) Inverter connector specifications (a) P in layout in the PU port Th[...]

  • Seite 481

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 GOT Side Settings 15 - 29 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SER[...]

  • Seite 482

    15 - 30 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.4 GOT Side Settings HINT HINT HINT Cutting the portion of multiple connection of the controller By setting GOT internal devi ce, GOT can cut the portion of multiple connection of the controller. For example, faulty station that has communication timeout can be cut from the system. For details of the setting conten[...]

  • Seite 483

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 31 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE[...]

  • Seite 484

    15 - 32 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.2 Connecting FREQROL-E500 series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of inver[...]

  • Seite 485

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 33 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE[...]

  • Seite 486

    15 - 34 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.4 Connecting FREQROL-A500, A500L series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings o[...]

  • Seite 487

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 35 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE[...]

  • Seite 488

    15 - 36 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.6 Connecting FREQROL-E700 series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of inver[...]

  • Seite 489

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 37 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE[...]

  • Seite 490

    15 - 38 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.8 Connecting FREQROL-F700/700P series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of [...]

  • Seite 491

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 39 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE[...]

  • Seite 492

    15 - 40 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs 15.5.9 Connecting FREQROL-F700PJ series  Communication settings Make the communication setti ngs of the inverter . Be sure to perform the i nverter reset after updating each parameter . (1) Communication port and corresponding parameters (2) Communication settings of inv[...]

  • Seite 493

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 41 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE[...]

  • Seite 494

    15 - 42 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQROL Series Inverter Side Settin gs HINT HINT HINT (1) Automatic setting with Pr .999 If Pr .999 is set as the following, the communication settings other than [PU communication station number] and [Communication EEPROM write selection] can be automatically set in a batch to the default communication settings[...]

  • Seite 495

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.5 FREQRO L Series In verter Side Settings 15 - 43 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVE[...]

  • Seite 496

    15 - 44 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set The device ranges of controller that can be used for GOT are as follows. Note that the device ranges in the following tables are the maximum values that can be set in GT Desi gner3. The device specifications of controllers may differ depending on the[...]

  • Seite 497

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 15 - 45 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNEC[...]

  • Seite 498

    15 - 46 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.6 Device Range that Can Be Set POINT POINT POINT (1) M onitoring Pr .37 GOT cannot monitor the paramete r (Pr .37) of FREQROL-E500/S500(E)/F500J/D700/F70 0PJ/ E700. (2) When setting "8888" or "9999" to inverter parameter (Pr) "8888" and "9 999" designate special function. T [...]

  • Seite 499

    15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.7 Precau tions 15 - 47 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AM[...]

  • Seite 500

    15 - 48 15. INVERTER CONNECTION 15.7 Precautions[...]

  • Seite 501

    16 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 SERVO AMPLI F IER CONNECTION 16 - 1 16. SER VO AMPLIFIE[...]

  • Seite 502

    16 - 2 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connectable Model List 16. SER VO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.1 Connect able Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. *1 For the RS-422 communication, use MELSERVO-J4 of sof tware version A3 or a later version. Series Model name Clock Communication type Refer to MELSERVO- J2-Super MR-J2S- [...]

  • Seite 503

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 3 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTI[...]

  • Seite 504

    16 - 4 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16.2.2 Connecting to the MELSER VO-J2M Series  When connecting via RS-232 communication *1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3.  When connecting via RS-422 communication *1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 Connect it to the RS-232 interface [...]

  • Seite 505

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 5 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTI[...]

  • Seite 506

    16 - 6 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration  When connecting to multiple serv o amplifiers (RS-422 connection ) *1 Connect the connector of the servo amplifier to CN3. *2 The distributor is a product manufactured by HACHIKO ELECTR IC CO., L TD. For details, con tact HACHIKO EL ECTRIC CO., LT D . GOT Distributor Connection cab[...]

  • Seite 507

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.2 System Configuration 16 - 7 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTI[...]

  • Seite 508

    16 - 8 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Connection Diagram 16.3 Connection Diagram The following diag ram shows the connection between the GOT and the servo amplifier . 16.3.1 RS-232 cable  Connection diagram  Precautions when prep aring cable (1) Cable length The length o f the cable R S-232 must be 15m o r less. (2) GOT side connector Fo[...]

  • Seite 509

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Conne ction Diagram 16 - 9 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTIO[...]

  • Seite 510

    16 - 10 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Connection Diagram RS422 connection diagram 3) RS422 connection diagram 4) RS422 connection diagram 5) *1Make the wiring between the distributor and servo amplifier as short as possible. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - GOT side Distributor side (Modular connector) 3 5 2 7 1 6 4 8 SDA RDA RSA CSA SG SDB RDB RSB CSB FG[...]

  • Seite 511

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.3 Conne ction Diagram 16 - 11 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTI[...]

  • Seite 512

    16 - 12 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 GOT Side Settings 16.4 GOT Side Settings 16.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 3. [...]

  • Seite 513

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.4 GOT Side Settings 16 - 13 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION[...]

  • Seite 514

    16 - 14 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16.5.1 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J2-Super Series POINT POINT POINT MELSERVO-J2-Super Series For detai ls of the MELSER VO-J2-Super Series, refer to the following manual. See the technical manual for the MELSERVO- J2-Super Series servo a[...]

  • Seite 515

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16 - 15 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVER[...]

  • Seite 516

    16 - 16 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.5 Setting on Servo Amplifier Side 16.5.3 Connecting to the MELSERVO-J4,J3 Series POINT POINT POINT MELSERVO-J 4, J3 Series For details of the MELSERVO-J4, J3 Series, refer to the following manual. See the technical manual for the MELSERVO- J4, J3 Series servo amplifiers.  Parameters of MELSERVO-J4, J3 Se[...]

  • Seite 517

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 17 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 518

    16 - 18 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set POINT POINT POINT Monitoring servo amplifier Carefully read the manual of servo amplifier to be connected and fully un derstand the operating procedures before monitoring. Before operation, check the parameter settings. Improper settings may cause some machines to perform unex[...]

  • Seite 519

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 19 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 520

    16 - 20 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (3) MELSERVO-J2M-*DU *1 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing paramet e rs to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writing p arameters to E 2 PROM of the servo amplifier . *2 The GOT cannot read or write data f rom/to consecutive devices. POINT POINT POINT Precau[...]

  • Seite 521

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 21 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 522

    16 - 22 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (g) Input signal for test oper ation (for test operation) (h) F orced output of signal pin (for test operatio n) (i) Set data (for test operation) (4) MELSERVO-J2S-*A *1 Use PRM0 to PRM84 when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1084 are used when writ[...]

  • Seite 523

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 23 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 524

    16 - 24 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the p arameter data. (e) St atus display (f) Alarm (g) E xternal I/O signal (h) I nput signal for test operation (fo r test operation) (i) F[...]

  • Seite 525

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 25 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 526

    16 - 26 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (d) Basic parameter/expansion parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effect ive when the pow er is turned of f once and back on after sett ing the parameter data. (e) St atus display Device name Item Symbol *1 PRM0, PRM1000 Command system/[...]

  • Seite 527

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 27 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 528

    16 - 28 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (6) MELSERVO-J2S-*CL *1 PRM0 to PRM90 are used when writing parameters to the servo amplifier RAM. PRM1000 to PRM1090 are used when writing p arameters to E 2 PROM of the servo amplifier . *2 The GOT cannot read or write data f rom/to consecutive devices. *3 Use the integer nu[...]

  • Seite 529

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 29 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 530

    16 - 30 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (f) Alarm (g) E xternal I/O signal (h) C urrent position latch d ata (i) The value of the general-purpose register (Rx) (j) The value of the general-purpose register (Dx) (k) Input signal for test operati on (for test operation) (l) Forced output of signal pin (for test operat[...]

  • Seite 531

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 31 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 532

    16 - 32 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (e) G ain filter parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the p arameter data. (f) Extension setting parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting b[...]

  • Seite 533

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 33 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 534

    16 - 34 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (j) External input (k) External o utput (l) Input signal for test oper ation (for test operation) (m) Forced ou tput of signal pin (for test operation) (n) S et data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol DI0 Input device statuses ― DI1 External input pin statuses ― [...]

  • Seite 535

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 35 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 536

    16 - 36 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (d) B asic setting parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the p arameter data. (e) G ain filter parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting beco[...]

  • Seite 537

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 37 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 538

    16 - 38 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (j) Alarm (k) External inpu t (l) External output (m) Point table (position) (n) I nput signal for test operation (fo r test operation) (o) Forced output of signal pin (for test operati on) (p) S et data (for test operation) Device name Item Symbol AL0 Current alarm number ―[...]

  • Seite 539

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 39 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 540

    16 - 40 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (d) B asic setting parameter *1 For the parameters prefixed by an asterisk (*), setting becomes effective when the power is turned off once and back on after setting the p arameter data. (e) G ain filter parameter Device name Item Symbol *1 P A1, P A1001 Opera tion mode *STY P[...]

  • Seite 541

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 41 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 542

    16 - 42 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (h) Extension setting 2 parameter (i) Extension setting 3 parameter (j) S tatus display (k) Alarm (compatible with MELSER VO-J3-*A) Device name Item Symbol PE1 to 40, PE1000 to 1040 For man ufacturer sett ing ― PE41, PE1041 Function sele ction E-3 EOP3 PE42 to 64, PE1042 to [...]

  • Seite 543

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 16 - 43 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER[...]

  • Seite 544

    16 - 44 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.6 Device Range that Can Be Set (m) External input (n) External output (o) Input signal for test oper ation (for test operation) (p) F orced output of signal pin (for test operatio n) (q) S et data (for test operation) ALM246 Detailed alarm from Al arm History 6th alarm in past ― ALM247 Detailed alarm from[...]

  • Seite 545

    16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.7 Precau tions 16 - 45 9 MELSECNET/H CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NETWORK) 10 MELSECNET/10 CONNECTION (PLC TO PLC NE T WORK) 11 CC-Link IE CONT ROLLER NETWORK CONNECTIO N 12 CC-Link IE FIELD NETWORK CONNECTION 13 CC-Link CONNECTION (INTELLI GENT DEVICE ST A TION) 14 CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) 15 INVERTER CONNECTION 16 S[...]

  • Seite 546

    16 - 46 16. SERVO AMPLIFIER CONNECTION 16.7 Precautions[...]

  • Seite 547

    17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 17 - 1 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17 - 2 17.2 System Configuration .[...]

  • Seite 548

    17 - 2 17. ROBOT CONTRO LLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connectable Model List 17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.1 Connect able Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. For details on the connection with CRnQ-700 (Q172DRCPU) , refe r to Mitsubishi Product s (Chapter 5 to 13). 17.2 System Configuration 17.2.1 Connecting to robot controlle[...]

  • Seite 549

    17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 17 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 17.3.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the c[...]

  • Seite 550

    17 - 4 17. ROBOT CONTRO LLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings *1 Click the [Setting] button an d perform the sett ing in the [GO T IP Address Setting] screen.  GT15, GT12 Item Description Range GOT NET No. Set the network No. of the GOT . (Default: 1) 1 to 239 GOT PLC No. Set the station No. of the GOT . (Default: 1) 1 to 64 GOT IP Address Set [...]

  • Seite 551

    17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.3 GOT Side Settings 17 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION POINT POINT POINT Example of [Detail setting]. For examples of [Detail setting], refer to the fo[...]

  • Seite 552

    17 - 6 17. ROBOT CONTRO LLER CONNECTION 17.4 PLC Side Settings 17.4 PLC Side Settings 17.4.1 Connecting to robot controller (CRnD-700) This section describes the settings of a GOT and a robot controller in the fo llowing case of syst em configuration. POINT POINT POINT Robot controller (CRnD-700) For details of the robot controller (CRnD-700), refe[...]

  • Seite 553

    17. ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 17.4 PLC Side Settings 17 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION POINT POINT POINT [Controller Setting] and [Ethernet] of GT Designer3 For [Controller Setting] a[...]

  • Seite 554

    17 - 8 17. ROBOT CONTRO LLER CONNECTION 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set 17.5 Device Range that Can Be Set For details on the device range that can be used on the GOT , refer to the following. 2.1 MELSEC-QnU/DC , Q17nD/M/NC/DR, CRnD-700 17.6 Precautions  When setting IP address Do not use "0" and "255" at the end of an IP ad[...]

  • Seite 555

    18 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18 - 1 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 - 2 18.2 System Configuration . . . . . . . [...]

  • Seite 556

    18 - 2 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.1 Connectable Model List 18. CNC CONNECTION 18.1 Connect able Model List The following table shows the conne ctable models. *1 Use the NC system software ver s ion D0 or late r. *2 Includes the case on the MELSECNET/H network system in the NET/10 mode. The GOT cannot be connected to the remote I/O network.. For the con[...]

  • Seite 557

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.2 System Configuration 18.2.1 Direct connection to CPU *1 Connect the connector of the CNC side to TERM[...]

  • Seite 558

    18 - 4 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18.2.2 MELSECNET/10 connection (PLC to PLC network) POINT POINT POINT (1) Connectable network MELSECNET/10 connection includes the case th at MELSECNET/H is used in NET/10 mode.The GOT cannot be connected to th e remote I/O network. Connect the GOT to the following netw ork systems as an ordinary[...]

  • Seite 559

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.2.3 CC-Link connection (i ntelligent device station) *1 The overall extension cable length and t he len[...]

  • Seite 560

    18 - 6 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.2 System Configuration 18.2.4 Ethernet connection *1 The destination connected with the twisted pair cable varies with the configuration of the applicable Ethernet net work system . Connect to the Ethernet module, hub, transceiver or other syst em equipment corresponding to the applicable Ethernet network system. Use c[...]

  • Seite 561

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.3 Conne ction Diagram 18 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.3 Connection Diagram The following dia gram shows the conne ction between the GOT and the CNC. 18.3.1 RS[...]

  • Seite 562

    18 - 8 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communication settings) Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 3. Set the foll[...]

  • Seite 563

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) MELSECNET/H *1 For details, refer to the following manual. Q corresponding MEL SECNET/H Network System Re[...]

  • Seite 564

    18 - 10 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings (4) CC-Link V er .2 (ID) *1 Transmission speed settings The following list s the transmission speed settings of the CC- Link communication. For details of the hard ware test, refer to the fol lowing manual. CC-Link System Master/Local Module User's Manual for CC-Link mod ule to be used (5) CC-[...]

  • Seite 565

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (6) Ethernet(MELSEC), Q17nNC, CRnD-700 (a) G T16, GT14 *1 Click the [Setting] button and perform the setting[...]

  • Seite 566

    18 - 12 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings (b) GT15, GT12 POINT POINT POINT (1) Communicati on interface setting by Utility The commu n ication in terface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communication Se ttings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project data. For details on the Utility , refer to the following manual. [...]

  • Seite 567

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 13 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.4.3 Ethernet setting *1 For operating CNC monitor function, set N/W No. to "239" . 18.4.4 Switc[...]

  • Seite 568

    18 - 14 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings (3) S tation number setting switch (4) Mode setting switch POINT POINT POINT (1) Switch setting exampl e For the switch setting exam ple, refer to the following. 18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connecti on (2) W hen the switch setting is changed When changing the switch setting a fter mounting the MELSECNET/10[...]

  • Seite 569

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.4 GOT Side Settings 18 - 15 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (3) T ransmission baudrate setting switch (4) Condition setting switches POINT POINT POINT (1) Switch settin[...]

  • Seite 570

    18 - 16 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18.5.1 MELSECNET/10 connection  Parameter setting Set parameters related to MELSECNET/10 with MELSEC's peripheral devices in the same way as parameter setting of MELSEC CPU, and write them on CNC by Personal computer . However , in the case of using the default parame[...]

  • Seite 571

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18 - 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Expansion unit setting s (1) FCU6-EX879 (Optical fiber cable) *1 Set th e network type to the PLC t o PL[...]

  • Seite 572

    18 - 18 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings (2) FCU6-EX878 (Coaxial cable) *1 Set the network type to the PLC to PLC network. *2 Set as necessary . *3 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. *4 Set the station type to the control station. For details of the p arameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK [...]

  • Seite 573

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18 - 19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.5.2 CC-Link (I D) connection  Parameter setting Set parameters related to CC- Link connection wi th GX[...]

  • Seite 574

    18 - 20 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings (2) Contents of setting *1 Set as necessary . *2 Set the station No. not to overlap with that of other units. For details of the p arameter setting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 No. Switch name Settings 1) Condition setting switch Set the operation condit[...]

  • Seite 575

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings 18 - 21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.5.3 Ethernet connection  System configuration The following shows the example of the system configurat[...]

  • Seite 576

    18 - 22 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.5 CNC Side Settings (b) Example of GX Developer setting For details of the paramete r s etting, refer to the following. C6/C64/C64T NETWORK INSTRUCTION MANUAL BNP-B2373 POINT POINT POINT IP address setting IP address setting on GX Develope r is invalid. Set the IP address b y the 7-segment LED and rotary switch of the[...]

  • Seite 577

    18. CNC CONNECTION 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set 18 - 23 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 18.6 Device Range that Can Be Set For details of the device range that can be used on the GOT , r[...]

  • Seite 578

    18 - 24 18. C NC CONNECTION 18.7 Precautions 18.7.4 Ethernet connection  Vi a network system GOT with Ethernet communication cannot access the CNCs in another network via the CNC (n etwork module, Ethernet module, etc.).  When connecting to multiple GOT s When connecting two or more GOT s in the Ethernet network, set each [PLC No.] to t h e G[...]

  • Seite 579

    MUL TIPLE GOT CONNECTIONS 19. GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 1 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 1[...]

  • Seite 580

    [...]

  • Seite 581

    19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19 - 1 19. GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that ca n be Monitored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 - 2 19.2 Connectable Model List . [...]

  • Seite 582

    19 - 2 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored 19. GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 19.1 CPU that can be Monitored The GOT can monitor only a CPU to which a serial multi-drop connection unit (GT01-RS4-M) is connected directly . Serial Multi-Drop Unit[...]

  • Seite 583

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19.2 Connect able Model List  Connecting the CPU to the Serial Mult i-Drop Connection Un[...]

  • Seite 584

    19 - 4 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When monitoring AnNCPU or A2SCPU, only the following or later software version is used to write to the CPU. • AnNCPU(S1) with link: V ersion L or later , AnNCPU(S1) without link: V ersion H or later • A2SCPU: V ersion H or later *2 GT10 can be connected[...]

  • Seite 585

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 When monitoring A0J2HCPU or A2CCPU, only the following or later[...]

  • Seite 586

    19 - 6 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 It is available by installing t he real time clock function boa rd or th e EEPROM memory with the real time clock function. *2 SB, SW , Ww , Wr , ER, and BM devices cannot be monitored. Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master modul[...]

  • Seite 587

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master mod[...]

  • Seite 588

    19 - 8 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List  Connecting the CPU to the Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (h ereinafter referred t o as "master module") in computer link connection The following table shows the connectable models. (Continued to next page) *1 When in multiple CPU syst em configuration, use CPU functi[...]

  • Seite 589

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 Ww and Wr devices cannot be mo nitored. Series Model name Clock[...]

  • Seite 590

    19 - 10 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List (Continued to next page) *1 When using SV13, SV22, or SV43, use the motion controller CP U on which any of the fol lowing main OS version is installed. • SW6RN-SV13Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV22Q : 00E or later • SW6RN-SV43Q : 00B or later *2 Use main modules with the following [...]

  • Seite 591

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 It is available by installing the real time clock fu nction bo[...]

  • Seite 592

    19 - 12 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.2 Connectable Model List Series Model name Clock Communication type Between CPU and master module Between master module and GOT FREQROL FREQROL-A500/A500L RS-422 RS-485 FREQROL-F500/F500L FREQROL-V500/V500L FREQROL-E500 FREQROL-S500/S500E FREQROL-F500J FREQROL-D700 FREQROL-F700PJ FREQROL-E700 FREQROL-A700 FR[...]

  • Seite 593

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.2 Connectab le Model List 19 - 13 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  [Controller T ype] and [Communication driver] of GT Designer3 The following table show[...]

  • Seite 594

    19 - 14 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.3 System Configuration 19.3 System Configuration *1 Connect it to the RS-422/485 interface (built into GOT). *2 The maximum distance from the PLC to the terminal GOT . *3 When the number of connected GOT s is in creased, the response p erformance decreases. *4 Connect it to the RS-232 interface (built into G[...]

  • Seite 595

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.4 Conne ction Diagram 19 - 15 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19.4 Connection Diagram The following diagra m shows the cable connection between th e serial [...]

  • Seite 596

    19 - 16 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram *1 Use the tw isted pair ca ble for SDA/ SDB. *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "1 10 ". *3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". 1.4.3 T erminating resistors of GOT *4 Connect a 1 10 terminating resistor to the GOT t[...]

  • Seite 597

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.4 Conne ction Diagram 19 - 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 Use the twisted pair cabl e for SDA/SDB and RDA/RDB. *2 Set the terminat ing resistor selec[...]

  • Seite 598

    19 - 18 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram *1 Use the tw isted pair ca ble for SDA/ SDB. *2 Set the terminating resistor selector to "1 10 ". *3 Set the terminating resistor setting switch of the GOT main unit to "Disable". 1.4.3 T erminating resistors of GOT *4 Connect a 1 10 terminating resistor to the GOT t[...]

  • Seite 599

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.4 Conne ction Diagram 19 - 19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 Set the terminat ing resistor selector to "OPE N". *2 Set th e termina ting resi [...]

  • Seite 600

    19 - 20 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram *1 Set the terminating resistor selector to "1 10 ". 19.6.3 Setting switches *2 Set the 2-wire/4-wire terminating resistor setting switch of the RS -232/485 signal conv ersion adaptor as follows. 2-wire type/4-wire type: 2-wire type (1Pair) • When GOT is a terminal T erminati[...]

  • Seite 601

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.4 Conne ction Diagram 19 - 21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION POINT POINT POINT Mixed wiring with various GOT s The GOT multi-drop connecti on can be used w[...]

  • Seite 602

    19 - 22 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.4 Connection Diagram  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable Use a shielded twisted pair cable of 0.3mm 2 or more as a cable for GOT multi-drop connection.The following shows recommended model names a nd manufacturers of the cable to be used. (2) Cable for converting D-sub9 pin connector to termina[...]

  • Seite 603

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.5 GOT Side Settings 19 - 23 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19.5 GOT Side Settings 19.5.1 Setting communication interface (communication settings) Set the c[...]

  • Seite 604

    19 - 24 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6.1 W rite the OS Write the st a ndard monitor OS and communicati on driver according to the desired conn ection type onto the serial multi-drop connection unit. For the OS writing methods, refer to the follow[...]

  • Seite 605

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19 - 25 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Controller setting 1. Set the following to the dr iver for the co[...]

  • Seite 606

    19 - 26 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit (2) Assignment content s of the PLC side word device The following table shows the device assignment contents when setting [Head Device (10 Points)] to "D0". (3) Details on the word device assignment content s (a) Control signal 1-1 < 10 second cycl[...]

  • Seite 607

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19 - 27 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Exporting/Importing the communication setting content s (1) Expor[...]

  • Seite 608

    19 - 28 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.6 Setting of Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit 19.6.3 Setting switches Set the switches according to the connection type. POINT POINT POINT Serial Multi-Drop Connection Unit For details on the Seri al Multi-Drop Connection Unit, refer to the following manual. Serial Multi-Drop Connectio n Unit User ’s Manu[...]

  • Seite 609

    19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONN ECTION 19.7 Setting of connection conversio n adapter 19 - 29 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 19.7 Setting of connection conversion adapter 19.7.1 Setting switches Se[...]

  • Seite 610

    19 - 30 19. GOT MULTI-DROP CONNECTION 19.8 Precautions 19.8 Precautions  Connecting GT16 and GT15 in multi-drop connection (1) S tandard mo nitor OS installation, Writing Communication driver When connecting GT16/GT15 in multi-drop conn ection, the writing of the standard monitor OS and communication driver to the GOT from GT Designer3 (V ersion[...]

  • Seite 611

    20 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20 - 1 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 - 2 2[...]

  • Seite 612

    20 - 2 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connectable Model List 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.1 Connect able Model List For details of connectable models, refer to the following. 6. DIRECT CONNECTION T O CPU 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION 20.2 System Configuration 20.2.1 Connecting the GOT to[...]

  • Seite 613

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.2 System Configuration 20 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 When GT14, GT12, GT1 1 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multi ple [...]

  • Seite 614

    20 - 4 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.2 System Configuration 20.2.2 Connecting the GOT to PLC via RS-422 interface *1 When GT14, GT12, GT1 1 and GT10 are intermingled, the Multiple connect ion function is not supported. *2 The 2nd GOT must be a GT10 (input power supply: 24V) RS-232 built-in product. *3 For the connecti[...]

  • Seite 615

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.3 Conne ction Diagram 20 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20.3 Connection Diagram The following dia gram shows the conne ction[...]

  • Seite 616

    20 - 6 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.3 Connection Diagram 20.3.2 RS-422 cable  Connection diagram  Precautions when prep aring a cable (1) Cable length The length o f the RS-422 cable must be 30m or le ss. (2) GOT side connector For the GOT side connector , refe r to the following. 1.4.1 GOT connector specifica [...]

  • Seite 617

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings 20 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings 20.4.1 Setting communication interface (Communi[...]

  • Seite 618

    20 - 8 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings (3) [T ransparent] setting (GT14 only) 1. Select [Common] [Env ironment Setup] [GOT Setup], check [Enable GOT Setup], and select the [T ransparent] menu. 2. After [Controller CH No.] is displayed, check the channel No. connected to the target PLC of multiple GOT[...]

  • Seite 619

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings 20 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20.4.2 Comm unication detail settings Make the setti ngs according to [...]

  • Seite 620

    20 - 10 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.4 GOT Side Settings (3) QnA/L/Q CPU (GT10) (4) MELSEC-A (GT10) POINT POINT POINT (1) C ommunication interface setting by the Utility The communication interface setting can be changed on the Utility's [Communica tion Settings] after writing [Communication Settings] of project[...]

  • Seite 621

    20. MULTIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECT ION FUNCTION 20.5 Precau tions 20 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 20.5 Precautions  GOT's communication timing (1) GOT's commun[...]

  • Seite 622

    20 - 12 20. MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT 11, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 20.5 Precautions[...]

  • Seite 623

    MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 1[...]

  • Seite 624

    [...]

  • Seite 625

    21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21 - 1 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel F unction? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 - 2 21.2 System Configuration . . . . .[...]

  • Seite 626

    21 - 2 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.1 What is Multi-channel Function? Multi-channel Function is a function to m onitor up to four F A controllers (PLC CPU, te mperature controlle r , inverter , etc.) on one GOT by writing multiple communication drive rs in the GOT . (For GT155 , up [...]

  • Seite 627

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.1 What is Mu lti-channel Function? 21 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Features of the multi-channel fun ction (1) With a single unit of GOT , the syste[...]

  • Seite 628

    21 - 4 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration 21.2 System Configuration 21.2.1 Bus connection and serial connection One GOT can monitor a PLC CPU, temperat ure controller and servo ampl ifier , etc. Therefore, the system conf iguration, in which several controllers are mixed, can be easily established. In addition, each system can be[...]

  • Seite 629

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.2 System Configuration 21 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION POINT POINT POINT Controllers that use Channels No.5 to 8 The following shows the drivers tha t c[...]

  • Seite 630

    21 - 6 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.2 System Configuration 21.2.2 Ethernet multiple connection One GOT can make several Et hernet connectio ns and the bus or network conn ections. Therefore, the system configuration, in which several netw orks are linked, can be established. MELSECNET/H Communication driver MELSEC-FX Communication driver Ethernet[...]

  • Seite 631

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21.3.1 Basics of in terface selection This section expl ains basic knowl e dg[...]

  • Seite 632

    21 - 8 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) S pecifications *1 MELSECNET/H connection, MELSECNET/10 connection, CC-Link IE Contr oller Network connection, CC-Link co nnection (intelligent device st ation) *2 Ethernet connection, MODBUS ® /TCP co nnection *3 Gateway function, MES interface functi on, Ethernet download *4 Fingerpri[...]

  • Seite 633

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *6 GT16M-V4, GT15V -75V4, GT16M-R2, GT15V -75R1, GT16M-V 4R1, GT15V -75V4R1, GT16M-ROUT , GT15V -75R[...]

  • Seite 634

    21 - 10 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings  Calculating consumed current For using multiple extension units, a bar code reader , or a RF ID controller , the total current for the extension units, bar code reader , or RFID controller must be within the current that the GOT can supply . For the current that the GOT can supply and t[...]

  • Seite 635

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (3) Calculation example (a) When connecting the GT15-J7 1BR13, GT15-RS4-9S (3 units), GT15-J71E71-1[...]

  • Seite 636

    21 - 12 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21.3.2 General flow from system selection to drawing System selection for using the multi- channel functio n is explained be low . Make selection and setting for the multi-channel function by following the order shown below . System selection Determine the connection type and the ch annel N[...]

  • Seite 637

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 13 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3.3 Determining the connection ty pe and channel No. (System s election)  Determining the con[...]

  • Seite 638

    21 - 14 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings Connection ty pe Reference Serial connection Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Computer link connection 7. COMPUTER LINK CONNECTION CC-Link connection (via G4) 14. CC-Link CONNECTION (Via G4) Inverter co nnection 15. INVER TER CONNECTION Servo amplifier connect ion 16. SER V[...]

  • Seite 639

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 15 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION The following sh ows the appl icable combinations of con nection types, the number of channels, and[...]

  • Seite 640

    21 - 16 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) GT15 For GT15, the combination s of the bus, network, or Eth e rnet connection and the serial connecti on are available as shown in the following table. (Continued to next page) Connection ty pe Reference Bus/network/Ethernet connection Bus connection 5. BUS CONNECTION Ethernet connecti[...]

  • Seite 641

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION Connection type Reference Serial connection Direct CPU connection 6. DIRECT CONNECTION TO CPU Compu[...]

  • Seite 642

    21 - 18 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings The number of channels and the functions tha t can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. The table below shows the allowable combinations of c onn ection types, the number of chan nels and restricted functions. : Allowed : Restricted *1 When the functions below are used, the conne[...]

  • Seite 643

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION The number of channels and the functi ons that can be used differ depending on the GOT to be used. [...]

  • Seite 644

    21 - 20 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (4) GT12 For GT12, the combinations o f the Ethernet connectio n and the serial connectio n are available as shown in the following table Connection ty pe Reference Ethernet connectio n Ethernet connectio n 8.ETHERNET CONNECTION CNC connection (Ethernet connec tion) 18.2.4Ether net connecti[...]

  • Seite 645

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION The number of channel s and the functions that can be used di ffer depending on the GOT to be used.[...]

  • Seite 646

    21 - 22 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings  Determining the channel No. (1) Channel No. of PLC, motion controller , temperature controller , inverter , servo amplifier , CNC, robot controller After determining the connection type to be used, determi ne the channe l Nos. (CH No. 1 to CH No. 4) to be used for the respective connect[...]

  • Seite 647

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 23 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3.4 Determining the GOT side in terface (Interface selection) T o u se the multi-channel functio[...]

  • Seite 648

    21 - 24 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) GT15 • Install communication units on the extension interfaces. • Use communic ation unit s installed on th e extension in terfaces with the RS-232 interface buil t in the GOT . 3rd stage Extension interface 1 Extension interface 2 Standard interface 1 (RS-232 interface built in the[...]

  • Seite 649

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 25 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION For the connectio n via the connection type selected in 21.3 .3 , select interfaces and communicati[...]

  • Seite 650

    21 - 26 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings  GOT interface used for bus connection For the bus connection, use the following communication units. *1 T o mount multiple unit s, the GT15-QBUS(2) or GT15-ABUS(2) is required. POINT POINT POINT (1) Bus connection units to be used GT15-QBUS(2) and GT15-ABUS(2) can be used ind ependen t [...]

  • Seite 651

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 27 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  GOT interface used for Ethern et connection For the Ethernet connection, use the followi ng int[...]

  • Seite 652

    21 - 28 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) GT15 *1 The operator authentication (external authenticat ion or fingerpri nt authentication) or the F A transparent function (RS-232 communication) uses the RS-232 int erface built in the GOT . *2 For the RS-422 communication using the RS-232 interface built in the GOT , the RS-422 con[...]

  • Seite 653

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 29 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (b) Remote personal computer opera tion (serial), video di splay fun ction, multimedia functi on an[...]

  • Seite 654

    21 - 30 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings (2) Combinations of units that affect the number of available channels The following are examples of unit combinations th at a ffect the number of available channels. POINT POINT POINT Installing a unit on another unit (Checking the unit installation positio n) For details on the precaution[...]

  • Seite 655

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 31 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION Example 2) T o add the serial connection (1 cha nnel) to the system using the bus co nnection (unit[...]

  • Seite 656

    21 - 32 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet Write down the following items selected in this section to the check sheet. Selection of interface (communication unit) Write down the name of interface and the model name of communication unit to be used for each of the connection type. (Continued to[...]

  • Seite 657

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 33 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet Write down the following items to the check sheet. Attachin[...]

  • Seite 658

    21 - 34 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 3. After writing down CH No., write down the communication driver name for each connection type. For the communication drivers used for the respective connection types, refer to the following. Chapters of each respective connection type * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension i[...]

  • Seite 659

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 35 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3.5 Setting for communication settings Make communication settings based on the interface and th[...]

  • Seite 660

    21 - 36 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings Example: Setting example for "Bus connecti on (1 channel ) + Serial conne ction (3 channels) + Bar code reade r" (In the case of th e GT157 ) 4 5 1 2 3 Serial communication unit (GT15-RS2-9P) OMRON temperature controller connection Serial communication unit (GT15-RS4-9P) Inverter [...]

  • Seite 661

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 37 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION Example: Setting example for "MELSECNET/H connection (1 channel) + Serial conn ection (1 chann[...]

  • Seite 662

    21 - 38 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings Example: Setting example for Ethernet conn ecti on (4 channels) (In the case of the GT1685) Y ASKAW A PLC Ethernet connection MODBUS /TCP connection YOKOGA WA PLC Ethernet connection QCPU Ethernet connection Ethernet interface built in the GOT[...]

  • Seite 663

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings 21 - 39 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.3.6 Items to be checked before starting drawing The following describes that should be understo [...]

  • Seite 664

    21 - 40 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.3 GOT Side Settings  Clock function Set the controller for which adjust/broadca st should be executed by the CH No. GT Designer3 V ersio n Screen Design Manual  F A transparent function Set the controller for which the F A transparent function should b e executed by the CH No. 22.5.1 Sett ing communicati[...]

  • Seite 665

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.4 Precau tions 21 - 41 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 21.4 Precautions 21.4.1 Precautions for hardware T o use the multi-channel func tion, an option fu nctio[...]

  • Seite 666

    21 - 42 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet This section provides the check sheet to be used for Comm unication Settings when the mult i-channel function is used. Sections 21.3.3 to 21.3.5 contain explanations of the items to be che cked on the check sheet. Checking items expla[...]

  • Seite 667

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Che ck Sheet 21 - 43 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Check sheet No.1 (selection of co nnection type and interface) (1) Channel No[...]

  • Seite 668

    21 - 44 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet  Check sheet No. 2 (selection of GOT side interface) Attaching the communication unit ( 1.3.7) (1) GT16 (4) (2) Extension interface 1 1rd stage 2rd stage 3rd stage Com. unit name CH No. Com. unit name CH No . Com. unit name CH No . 1rd stage 2rd stage 3rd stage Com. unit[...]

  • Seite 669

    21. MULTI-CHANNEL FUN CTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Che ck Sheet 21 - 45 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) GT15 * For the GT155 , setting is made only for Extension interface 1. (7) (4[...]

  • Seite 670

    21 - 46 21. MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 21.5 Multi-channel Function Check Sheet[...]

  • Seite 671

    F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22. F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 1[...]

  • Seite 672

    [...]

  • Seite 673

    22 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22 - 1 22. F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.1 F A T ransparent Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 - 2 22.2 Compatible Sof tware . [...]

  • Seite 674

    22 - 2 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.1 FA Transparent Function 22. F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.1 F A T ransparent Function The F A transparent fun ction allows the sequence programs of the Mitsubishi PLC to be read, written and monitored from a personal computer connected via a GOT . 22.2 Comp atible Software The following shows the software comp[...]

  • Seite 675

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.2 Compatibl e Software 22 - 3 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  Connecting the GOT and pers onal computer with RS-232 (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in[...]

  • Seite 676

    22 - 4 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. *1 MR Configurator (MRZJW3-SETUP221E) V ersion B1 or la ter is required to use the F A transp arent function. *2 FR C onfigurator(FR-SW2-SETUP-W J) Ver .1.02 or later [...]

  • Seite 677

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.2 Compatibl e Software 22 - 5 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following sh ows the softwar[...]

  • Seite 678

    22 - 6 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software  Connecting the GOT and personal compute r with USB (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. *1 GX Developer Version 8.22Y or later is re quired to use th e FA transp arent function. GX Developer V ersion 8.68W o[...]

  • Seite 679

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.2 Compatibl e Software 22 - 7 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection The following sh ows the software a[...]

  • Seite 680

    22 - 8 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. *1 GX Developer Version 8.62Q or later is re quired to use t he F A transparent function. GX Developer V ersion 8.68W or later is required to use the F A transparen[...]

  • Seite 681

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.2 Compatibl e Software 22 - 9 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Eth ernet (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Bus con[...]

  • Seite 682

    22 - 10 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.2 Compatible Software (3) When connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection The following shows the software and the accessible PLC CPUs. *1 GX Developer Version 8.78G or later is re quired to use t he F A transparent function. *2 GX Works2 V ersion 1.16S or later is re quired to use the F A transpar[...]

  • Seite 683

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 11 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored The following models support F A tra[...]

  • Seite 684

    22 - 12 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored *1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the mu ltiple CPU sy stem since Q12DCCPU-V1 and Q24DHCCPU-V have no direct coupled I/F . *2 When using Q12DCCPU-V1 or Q24DHCCPU-V as the connect ed CPU, only MX Component can be used. When accessing other CPUs relaying Q12DCCPU-V or Q24DH[...]

  • Seite 685

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 13 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU sy[...]

  • Seite 686

    22 - 14 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. *2 Do not execute the write dur ing RUN in the bus connection. Series Model name T arget software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Co[...]

  • Seite 687

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 15 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CP U system since Q173NCCPU has[...]

  • Seite 688

    22 - 16 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored  When connecting the GOT and PC with Ethernet (Continued to next page) *1 Use the serial port of QCPU in the multiple CPU system, since QnUDEHCPU has no direct coup led I/F . *2 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. [...]

  • Seite 689

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 17 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connec tion a[...]

  • Seite 690

    22 - 18 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Series Model name T arget sof tware Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Et hernet connection *1 MELSEC-A (AnCPU[...]

  • Seite 691

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 19 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connec tion a[...]

  • Seite 692

    22 - 20 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. *2 GT1 1 is not supported. *3 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PL C in bus connection. *4 A motion controller is required between the GOT and PLC in direct CPU[...]

  • Seite 693

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 21 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and persona l computer with modem (Continued to ne[...]

  • Seite 694

    22 - 22 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Series Model name T arget software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection *1 C Controller modu[...]

  • Seite 695

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 23 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connec tion a[...]

  • Seite 696

    22 - 24 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Monitored (Continued to next page) *1 GT14 models compatible with Et hernet co nnecti on are only GT1455-QTBDE and GT1450-QLBDE. Series Model name T arget software Connection type Bus connection Direct CPU connection Computer link connection Ethernet connection *1 Motion controller[...]

  • Seite 697

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.3 List of Models that Can Be Mo nitored 22 - 25 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 GT14 models compatible with Ethernet connec tion are only GT145 5-QTBDE and[...]

  • Seite 698

    22 - 26 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.1 GX Developer , GX Works2, GX LogViewer , MX C omp onent, MX Sheet, LCPU Logging Configuration T ool, Sett ing/Monitoring tool for C Controller module  When connecting the GOT and personal comp uter with serial or USB *1 Applicable to the QCPU only *2 G[...]

  • Seite 699

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 27 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Eth ernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) *1 The destinati[...]

  • Seite 700

    22 - 28 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration  When connecting the GOT and personal comp uter with modem *1 For connectable modems, system equipment and connec tion cables, refer to t he following T echnical News. List of valid d evices applicable for GOT1000 series (T10-0039) *2 GT10 is not applicab le to the bus connection. *3 [...]

  • Seite 701

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 29 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.4.2 PX D eveloper , GX Configurator GOT PC PLC Varies according to the connection type. Conn[...]

  • Seite 702

    22 - 30 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.3 MT Developer , MT Works2  When connecting the GOT and personal comp uter with serial or USB *1 GT10 is not applicab le to the bus connection. *2 GT1 1 and GT10 are not applicable to the Ethernet connectio n. *3 The use of RS-232/USB conversion adapt or requires an inst allation[...]

  • Seite 703

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 31 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Eth ernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) *1 The destinati[...]

  • Seite 704

    22 - 32 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.4 MR Configurator , MR Configurator2  When connecting the GOT and personal comp uter with serial or USB *1 Only MR Configurator2 is compatible with th e Ethernet connection. Connection type dependant Communication driver Connection type dependant Communication driver GOT Servo am[...]

  • Seite 705

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 33 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PC with Eth ernet (For GT16, GT15, GT14, GT12) *1 The destinati[...]

  • Seite 706

    22 - 34 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22.4.5 FR Configurator 22.4.6 F X Configurator-FP , FX Configurator-EN *1 The use of RS-232/USB conversion adapt or requires an inst allation of the dedicated communication driver onto personal computer . RS-232/USB Conversion adaptor User' s Manual Inverter GOT Varies according to [...]

  • Seite 707

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.4 System Configuration 22 - 35 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.4.7 R T T oolBox2 *1 CRnD-700 is not applicable to the bus connection, the direct CPU connec[...]

  • Seite 708

    22 - 36 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings 22.5 GOT Side Settings 22.5.1 Setting communication interface  Controller setting Set the channel of the connected equipment. 1. Select [Common] [Contr oller Setting] from the menu. 2. The Controller Setting window is displ ayed. Select the channel to be used from the list menu. 3. Set M[...]

  • Seite 709

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings 22 - 37 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION *1 Click the [Setting] button and per form the s etting in the [GOT IP Address Setti ng] screen. P[...]

  • Seite 710

    22 - 38 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.5 GOT Side Settings  GOT Setup When using the multi-channel function (only GT16 , GT15, GT14, GT12), specify the channel No. on which F A transparent function is executed. 1. Select [Common] [GOT Environmental Setting] [GOT Setup] from the menu. 2. Check [Enable GOT Setup]. 3. Select the [T ra nsparent] tab[...]

  • Seite 711

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 39 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.1 Accessing the PLC by the GX Developer , PX[...]

  • Seite 712

    22 - 40 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection( when connec ted to t he QJ71C24(N)) (GX Configurator is not supported.) 1. Click [Online] [Transfer Setup] in GX Developer . 2. The [T ra nsfer Setup] is displayed. 3. Set the [T ransfer Setup]: PC side I/F : Serial PL[...]

  • Seite 713

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 41 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication (when connecting to QCP[...]

  • Seite 714

    22 - 42 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  Connecting the GOT and PLC in direct CPU connection (when connecting to FXCPU) POINT POINT POINT How to operate GX Developer For the GX Developer operation method, refer to the following manual. GX Developer V ersion Operating Manual 12. The screen returns to [T ran sfer Se[...]

  • Seite 715

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 43 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.2 Accessing by GX Works2 The following shows the procedure to set the F A transp[...]

  • Seite 716

    22 - 44 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting (2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C24 (N)) 1. Click the Connection D estination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displa ye[...]

  • Seite 717

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 45 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (3) Connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet connection (a) Connecting to QCPU (Q mode)[...]

  • Seite 718

    22 - 46 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting (b) Co nnecting to FXCPU 10. S peci fy the number for [Network No.] and [S tation No.] same as the numb er assigned to the Ethernet module. When [QnUDE(H)] is set for [PLC type], the setting is not required. 11 . Specify the IP address for [IP Address] same as the IP address as[...]

  • Seite 719

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 47 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (4) Connecting the GOT and Ethernet adapter (NZ2GF- ETB) in Ethernet connection, and [...]

  • Seite 720

    22 - 48 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 1. Click the Connection D estination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of GX Works2. 2. The [Transfer Setup Connection1] is displa yed. 3. Set the [T ran sfer Setup Connection1]. PC side I/F : Serial USB PLC side I/F : GOT 4.[...]

  • Seite 721

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 49 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 9. [GOT (Ethernet) T ransparent Setting] is displayed . Here, set the Ethe rnet modul[...]

  • Seite 722

    22 - 50 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet conn ection (GT16, GT15 and GT14 only) (1) Connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection or direct CPU connection (when connecting to QCPU (Q mode)) 16. Network Co mmunication Route Detailed Setting of CC IE Field is [...]

  • Seite 723

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 51 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) Connecting the GOT and PLC in computer link connection (when connecting to QJ71C2[...]

  • Seite 724

    22 - 52 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.3 Accessing by GX LogViewer The following shows the procedure to set the F A transparent function of GX LogViewer . 6. Double-click [GOT] of the PLC side I/F to display [PLC side I/F Detailed Setting of GOT]. 7. Set the IP address and port No. in [Ethernet detail setting f[...]

  • Seite 725

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 53 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.4 Accessing PLC by GX Configurator-QP The following shows the procedure to set t[...]

  • Seite 726

    22 - 54 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Developer This section explains the pro cedure to set the F A transparent function of MT Developer with an exampl e of connecting to motion controller CPU (Q series). 1. Click [Communication] [Communica tion Setting] in MT Developer . 2. Check-mark ei[...]

  • Seite 727

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 55 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.6 Accessing by the MT Works2 This section explai ns the procedure to set the F A[...]

  • Seite 728

    22 - 56 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication 1. Click the Connection D estination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation window of MT Works2. 2. The [T ra nsfer Setup] is displayed. 3. Set the [T ransfer Setup]: PC side [...]

  • Seite 729

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 57 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT and personal computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15 [...]

  • Seite 730

    22 - 58 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.7 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator Make the F A transparent se ttings w ith the of MT Developer . For details, refer to the following: 22.6.5 Accessing by the MT Develo per 22.6.8 Accessing the servo amplifier by the MR Configurator2 Make the F A transp[...]

  • Seite 731

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 59 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.10 Accessing PLC by FX Configurator-FP This section explains th e procedure to s[...]

  • Seite 732

    22 - 60 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.1 1 Acces sing by FX Configurator- EN This section explains the pro cedure to set the F A transparent function of the FX Configurat or-EN. 1. Click [T ransfer setup] on the FX Configurator-EN. 2. Mark the [Serial port/USB] checkbox in [Connecting interface]. 3. Check-mark [...]

  • Seite 733

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 61 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.12 Accessing by RT T oolBox2 This section explai ns the procedure to set the F A[...]

  • Seite 734

    22 - 62 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  Connecting the GOT and Controller in Ethernet connection 1. Right-click a project name to be a target on the project tree of RT T oolBox2. Click [Edit Project]. 2. Set [Method] to [CRnQ]. 3. Click [Detail]. 4. Check-mark either of the fo llowing in [Serial port]. Mark the [[...]

  • Seite 735

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 63 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.6.13 Accessing by NC Configurator The following shows the procedure to set the F A[...]

  • Seite 736

    22 - 64 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22.6.15 Accessing by LCPU Logging Configuration T ool The following shows th e procedure to set the F A transparent function of LCPU Logging Configura tion T ool . 22.6.16 Accessing by Setting/ Monitoring tool for C Controller module The following shows the procedure to set the[...]

  • Seite 737

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting 22 - 65 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION (2) When connecting the GOT and PLC in Ethernet communication 5. Mark the [via GOT(Bu[...]

  • Seite 738

    22 - 66 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.6 Personal Computer Side Setting  When connecting the GOT and persona l computer in Ethernet connection (GT16, GT15, and GT14 only) (1) When connecting the GOT and PLC in bus connection 1. Click the Connection D estination view [Connection Destination] [(Connection target data name)] in the Navigation windo[...]

  • Seite 739

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.7 Precau tions 22 - 67 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions 22.7.1 Precautions common to each software  GOT interface required to use the F A t[...]

  • Seite 740

    22 - 68 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions (2) When the F A transparent function is used in a bus connection When the F A transparent function is used in a bus connection, the following GX Developer function s or GX W orks2 functions can not be exec uted. The message [The executed fu nction is not supported. Please check the manual and ot[...]

  • Seite 741

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.7 Precau tions 22 - 69 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION  When connecting the GOT multi-drop connection F A transparent function is availa ble for each GOT i[...]

  • Seite 742

    22 - 70 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions  When performing [Read to PLC], [W rite to PLC] and other file operations on GX Developer , GX Works2 If any of the fol lowing GOT functi ons is executed d uring the file operation such as [Read to PLC] or [Write to PLC], an error may occur on the GOT , GX Deve loper , or GX Works2. In this ca[...]

  • Seite 743

    22. FA TRANSPAREN T FUNCTION 22.7 Precau tions 22 - 71 17 ROBOT CONTROLLER CONNECTION 18 CNC CONNECTION 19 GOT MUL TI-DROP CONNECTION 20 MUL TIPLE-GT14, GT12, GT1 1, GT10 CONNECTION FUNCTION 21 MUL TI-CHANNEL FUNCTION 22 F A TRANSP ARENT FUNCTION • Reading/Writing files of ladder edit  When PLC write is failed while using the F A transp arent [...]

  • Seite 744

    22 - 72 22. FA TRANSPARENT FUNCTION 22.7 Precautions 22.7.4 When using MR Configurator , MR Configurator2  Unavailable functions and restrictions For the use via the motion controller , there are unavailable functions an d restrictions. For details on the restrictions, refer to the help screen of MR Configurator .  Monitor speed of GOT Since [...]

  • Seite 745

    Index-1 INDEX INDEX [A] ABBREVIATIONS AND GENERIC TERMS ........ A-24 ACCESS RANGE FOR MO NITORING ............. .... 3-1 AnCPU type Bus connection .................... ............. ................ . 5-9 CC-Link connection (int elligent devi ce station) ................ ............. ............ ................. ............. .. 13-6 Computer l[...]

  • Seite 746

    Index-2 [E] Ethernet connection ............ ............. ............. ......... 8-1 [F] FA transparent function ................ ............... 22-1,22-2 FXCPU Direct connection to CPU .......... ................ ....... 6-10 Ethernet connection .............. .................... ......... 8-9 [G] GOT connector specifications ......... .......[...]

  • Seite 747

    Index-3 INDEX Computer link connection ................................ 7-29 Direct connection to CPU .............. ................... 6-28 Ethernet connection ................... ................ ...... 8-49 FA transparent function ........ ................ .......... 22-67 GOT MULTI-DROP CONNE CTION .. ............. 19-30 INVERTER CONNECTIO N .[...]

  • Seite 748

    Index-4 MULTI-CHANNEL FUNCTION ........................ 21-4 Multiple-GT14,GT12,GT11,GT10 con nection function ..................... ............ ............. .............. 20-2 ROBOT CONTROLLER CO NNECTION... ....... 17-2 Servo amplifier connection ........ ................ ....... 16-3 [T] Terminating resistors of GO T ... ............. .......[...]

  • Seite 749

    REVISIONS - 1 REVISIONS * The manual number is given on the bottom lef t of the back cover . Print Date * Manual Number Revision Oct., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-A First edition : Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) V ersion1.01B Nov ., 2009 SH(NA)-080898ENG-B B edition: Comp atible with GT Works3 (ELE) V ersion1.05F • Compatible with iQ W orks Jan.,2010 [...]

  • Seite 750

    REVISIONS - 2 * The manual number is given on the bottom lef t of the back cover. © 2009 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORA TION Print Date * Manual Number Revision Nov ., 2012 SH(NA)-080898ENG-O Compatible with GT Works3 (ELE) V e rsion1.63R • SAFETY PRECAUTIONS is changed. • C Controller module (Q24DHCCPU-V) compatible • Inverter connection (MELI[...]

  • Seite 751

    W ARRANTY Please confir m the followin g product warranty det ails before using thi s product. 1. Gratis W arranty T erm and Gratis W arranty Range If any fault s or defects (he reinafter "Fai lure") found to be the re sponsibility of Mi tsubishi occurs during use of the produc t within th e gratis warranty term, the pro duct shall be rep[...]

  • Seite 752

    SH(NA)-080898ENG-P GOT is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation. Microsoft, Windows, Windows NT , Windo ws Server , Windows Vi sta, and Windows 7 are registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the Un ited S tates and other countries. Adobe and Adobe Reader are registered tr ademarks of Adobe Systems Incorpor[...]

  • Seite 753

    Connection Manual (Mitsubishi Products) Series MODEL MODEL CODE SW1-GTD3-U(CON1)-ELE 1D7MC9 SH(NA)-080898ENG-P(1302)MEE for GT Works3 (ELE) Specifications subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan, February 2013. When exported from Japan, this manual does not require application to the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry for service tr[...]

  • Seite 754

    HEADQUARTERS EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. German Branch Gothaer Straße 8 D-40880 Ratingen Phone: +49 (0)2102 / 486-0 F ax: +49 (0)2102 / 486-1120 CZECH REP. MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.-org.sl. Czech Branch Radlická 751/113e CZ-158 00 Praha 5 Phone: +420 - 251 551 470 F ax: +420 - 251-551-471 FRANCE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V. Fr[...]